JP6767340B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more particularly to a gaming machine capable of displaying variable display of identification information and controlling it to an advantageous state advantageous to the player.

Such a game machine is composed of numerical information as the first identification information and decorative information as the second identification information when the variable display of the identification information is executed, and during the variable display, only the numerical information is changed. However, there was a mode in which decorative information was attached to numerical information when the fluctuation was stopped (Patent Document 1). In addition, there was a case where the variation display by the numerical information was started and the decorative information was attached to the numerical information in the middle of the variation (Patent Document 2).

JP-A-2007-135800 (Fig. 31) Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-173716 (FIGS. 8 and 9)

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machines of Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2, since the size of the numerical information as the first identification information when the fluctuation is stopped is uniform, the display mode of the decoration information as the second identification information In some cases, it may not be possible to display a suitable display.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying the first identification information and the second identification information.

(A) A gaming machine that can display variable identification information and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Equipped with variable display means capable of variable display of identification information
The identification information includes the first information and the second information.
The display pattern of the identification information includes a first display pattern that displays the first information without displaying the second information, and a second display pattern that displays the first information and the second information.
The variation display means executes the variation display according to the first display pattern after the identification information starts to change in a predetermined direction, and stops the variation display according to the second display pattern.
The display mode differs between the first information when displayed in the first display pattern and the first information when displayed in the second display pattern.
further,
A detection means that can detect the movement of the player,
A specific display execution means for performing a specific display corresponding to the detection means is provided.
The detecting means can detect a first operation with respect to the first operating means and a second operation with respect to the second operating means.
The specific display executing means is
As the specific display, the first specific display corresponding to the first operation with respect to the first operating means, the second operation corresponding to the second operating means, and more for the player than the first specific display. It is possible to display the second specific display, which has a high degree of advantage,
During the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display.
During the valid period of detection by the detection means, an operation effect using the second specific display after the change is executed .
The variable display means
In the special reach that develops after a lapse of a predetermined time from the reach state, the first information is reduced and displayed, and the first information is reduced and displayed according to the effect sound output during the special reach. Display the information with the specified operation,
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the first information is enlarged and displayed, and then the first information is reduced and displayed.
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the second information is displayed so as to appear from behind the first information displayed in an enlarged manner .
(1) With a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) that can perform variable display (variable display etc.) of identification information (design information, symbols, etc.) and control it to an advantageous state (big hit game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. There,
Equipped with variable display means (effect display device 9, effect control microcomputer 100, etc.) capable of executing variable display of identification information.
The identification information (design information, etc.) includes the first information (numerical information, numbers, etc.) and the second information (decorative information, characters, etc.).
The identification information display pattern includes a first display pattern (a pattern displayed by a number or the like) that displays the first information without displaying the second information, and a first display pattern that displays the first information and the second information. Two display patterns (patterns displayed with numbers and characters, etc.) are provided.
The variation display means executes the variation display according to the first display pattern (executes the variation display by numbers, etc.) after the identification information starts to fluctuate in a predetermined direction (downward direction, etc.), and also executes the second display. Stop the variable display depending on the pattern (stop the variable display by numbers and characters, etc.),
The display mode differs between the first information when displayed in the first display pattern and the first information when displayed in the second display pattern (as shown in FIG. 13, numbers). Numbers when displayed only with numbers are displayed larger than numbers when displayed with numbers and characters, etc.),
further,
Detection means that can detect the movement of the player (for example, push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A, touch sensor, infrared sensor, camera, etc.)
Specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, small button (white) D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button (white) shown in FIGS. 47 and 54 to 60. ) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc.) and specific display execution means (for example, button development effect processing (S90529), variable display during effect process (S90172), etc.)
With
The specific display executing means is
As the specific display, the first specific display (for example, small button (white) D901, etc.) and the advantage for the player over the first specific display (for example, jackpot expectation, 16R probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 29)). The second specific display (for example, when the first specific display is the small button (white) D901), the second specific display has a high degree of expectation, the degree of expectation of a probable change big hit when there is a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot. Large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, etc. When the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the second specific display is the large button (red) D903, stick D904, etc. When the first specific display is the large button (red) D903, the second specific display can display stick D904, etc.).
During the non-valid period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60), after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display. (For example, after displaying the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIG. 54 (C), the small button (white) D901 is changed to the large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 55 (G), and further. , Change the large button (white) D902 to the large button (red) D903 as shown in FIG. 55 (I)),
In the valid period of detection by the detection means (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60), the second specific display after the change (for example, shown in FIGS. 55 (J) and 55 (K)) is shown. As shown in FIG. 55 (K), the operation effect using the large button (red) D903, the large button (red) D903U, etc.) (for example, the operation is prompted as shown in FIG. 55 (K), and the result is obtained as shown in FIG. 55 (L). It is characterized in that the effect of notifying is executed.

According to such a configuration, the first identification information and the second identification information can be preferably displayed. In addition, the effect of production is improved.

(2) The game machine of (1) above.
The variable display means displays the second information (characters A to I, etc. shown in FIG. 12) according to the type of the first information (numbers 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 12) provided in a plurality of types. The variable display is stopped by the second display pattern (as shown in FIG. 13, the variable display is stopped by a pattern that displays characters corresponding to numbers, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the first identification information and the second identification information can be preferably displayed.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
When the variable display means is in the reach state, the display mode of the first information and the second information is displayed differently from the display mode before the reach state (as shown in FIG. 15). A large movement of the character is displayed as an action at the time of formation).

According to such a configuration, the first identification information and the second identification information can be preferably displayed.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
The variation display means executes a first change effect when changing from the first display pattern to the second display pattern (executes an effect of changing from only numbers to numbers and characters as an action when the fluctuation is stopped). , Execute the second change effect when changing from the second display pattern to the first display pattern (execute the effect of changing from numbers and characters to numbers only as an action at the start of fluctuation).
The execution mode is different between the first change effect and the second change effect (as shown in FIG. 14, in the variable stop symbol action executed as the first change effect, the character displays the screen of the effect display device 9. When viewed from the front, it jumps forward from the depth direction, the number moves down, the character is displayed larger than the number, and in the fluctuation start symbol action executed as the second change effect, the character from the number and the character Is deleted and only the number displayed larger than before the change fluctuates downward, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the first identification information and the second identification information can be preferably displayed.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
The variable display means displays identification information indicating that it is controlled to the advantageous state at the end of the reach effect by the first display pattern, and the final display of the identification information after the end of the reach effect is displayed in the second display. It is displayed by a pattern (as shown in FIG. 15, the symbols are aligned only with numbers at the end of SP reach, and the numbers and characters are used for the final display after returning to the normal background, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the first identification information and the second identification information can be preferably displayed.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the variable display means displays the second information so that the display range is wider than that of the first information before the stop (as shown in FIG. 13). When the variable display is stopped, the character is displayed wider than the display range of the numbers before the stop, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the first identification information and the second identification information can be preferably displayed.

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the variable display means displays the second information so as to jump out from the rear to the front of the gaming machine (as shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, when the variable is stopped). As a symbol action, the character displays the screen of the effect display device 9 so as to pop out from the depth direction when viewed from the front, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a powerful display using the second identification information.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
The advantageous state is provided with a first advantageous state (probability variation jackpot state, etc.) having a high advantage and a second advantageous state (normal jackpot state, etc.) having a lower advantage than the first advantageous state.
The first information (numbers corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, etc.) corresponding to the first advantageous state and the first information (numbers corresponding to the normal jackpot, etc.) corresponding to the second advantageous state are provided.
The variable display means executes the second display pattern only in the first information corresponding to the first advantageous state (as shown in the modified example, only in the numbers corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, the numbers and the characters Display with, etc.).

With such a configuration, it is possible to give a special impression to the first information having a high degree of advantage.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
The variable display is started based on the fact that the game medium (game ball, etc.) has entered the starting area (first starting winning opening 13 or second starting winning opening 14, etc.).
High-frequency state control that can control the starting region to a high-frequency state (time saving state, etc.) in which the game medium is more likely to enter than the normal state until a predetermined condition (fluctuation of 100 rotations, etc.) is satisfied after the advantageous state ends. Further equipped with means (microcomputer 560 for game control, etc.)
In the high frequency state, the variation display means starts the variation display in the first display pattern and stops the variation display in the first display pattern (in the time saving state, the variation is started only by the number). Stop the fluctuation with only numbers, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the first information can be preferably displayed in a high frequency state.

(10) The gaming machine according to any one of (3) to (9) above.
Further equipped with a production sound output means (microcomputer 100 for production control, audio output board 70, speaker 27, etc.) that outputs a production sound according to the production.
It may develop into a special reach (SP reach, etc.) after a predetermined time has passed since the reach state was reached.
In the special reach, the variable display means reduces and displays the first information (displays with a small symbol, etc.), and reduces and displays the first information according to the effect sound during the special reach. The information is displayed by performing a predetermined operation (as shown in FIG. 15, the small symbol is violently moved according to the effect sound during SP reach as the small symbol action pattern B).

According to such a configuration, the first information displayed in a reduced size can be preferably displayed.

(11) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above.
Further equipped with a notice effect execution means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) capable of executing a predetermined advance notice effect (full-screen advance notice effect, etc.)
The predetermined advance notice effect is executed so as to make the display mode of the identification information invisible or difficult to see at the start of the variable display (as shown in FIGS. 18 (B2), 20 (B2) or 22 (B2)). Blackout effect that makes the decorative design invisible),
When the predetermined advance notice effect is executed, the identification information can start variable display in a predetermined direction after the execution period of the predetermined advance notice effect has elapsed (FIGS. 18 (B2) and 20 (B2). ) Or, after the execution period of the blackout effect shown in FIG. 22 (B2) has elapsed, the decorative pattern as shown in FIGS. 18 (D2), (E2), 20 (D), (E) or 22 (D2). Forward fluctuations start, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the identification information from becoming difficult to understand, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include the following inventions (12) to (20). Conventionally, in a game machine, a game machine that displays an operation promotion image corresponding to the operation means during the valid period of the operation means (button, etc.) as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-83473 has been known. There is. In this gaming machine, the operation promotion image may gradually become larger if no operation is performed, or the operation promotion image in the shape of a button may change to the operation promotion image in the shape of a patrol lamp. However, the operation promotion image corresponding to the operation means changes with time, and the operation promotion image does not change when the operation is performed early, so that there is a problem that the effect is poor. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine having an improved effect.

(12) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.) capable of playing a game, and is a detecting means capable of detecting the movement of the player. (For example, push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A, touch sensor, infrared sensor, camera, etc.) and a specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, the small button (white) D901 shown in FIGS. 47 and 54 to 60). , Large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button (white) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc.) For example, the button development effect processing (S90529), the variable display during effect process (S90172), etc.) are provided, and the specific display execution means is the first specific display (for example, small button (white) D901) as the specific display. Etc.) and the degree of advantage for the player over the first specific display (for example, the expectation of a jackpot, the expectation of a 16R probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 29), and the expectation of a probability variation jackpot when there is a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot. The second specific display with a high degree) (for example, when the first specific display is a small button (white) D901, the second specific display is a large button (white) D902, a large button (red) D903, a stick D904, etc. When the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the second specific display is the large button (red) D903, stick D904, etc., and when the first specific display is the large button (red) D903, the second The specific display can display the stick D904 or the like), and the first specific display is displayed after the first specific display is displayed during the non-valid period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60). The first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, after displaying the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIG. 54 (C), the small button (white) D901 is shown in FIG. 55 (G). The large button (white) D902 is changed to the large button (white) D902, and the large button (white) D902 is changed to the large button (red) D903 as shown in FIG. 55 (I)), and the valid period of detection by the detection means ( For example, in T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60, the large button (red) D903 or the second specific display after the change (for example, as shown in FIGS. 55 (J) and 55 (K)) Operation effect using the large button (red) D903U, etc.) (For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (K), the operation is prompted and FIG. As shown in L), the effect of notifying the result, etc.) is executed.

According to the above configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(13) In the game machine of the above (12), the first specific display is an action effect acting on the specific display (for example, a weak action effect, a medium action effect, and a strong action effect shown in FIG. 49 (C)). Is executed to change to the second specific display (for example, the small button (white) D901 shown in FIG. 56 (C) has a small button (for example, as shown in FIGS. 56 (D) and 56 (E)). White) The large button (white) D902 is changed to the large button (white) as shown in FIG. 56 (E) and the large button (white) is changed to the large button (G) as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 57 (H) and 57 (I), the button (white) D902 is subjected to a medium-action effect of displaying the image TS901, the image TS902, and the image TS903 acting on the large button (white) D902. As shown in FIG. 57 (I), the stick D904 is changed, and the small button (white) D901 shown in FIG. 60 (A) is changed to the small button (white) as shown in FIGS. 60 (B) and 60 (C). ) The stick D904 may be changed as shown in FIG. 60 (C) by executing the strong action effect of displaying the image KS901, the image KS902, or the image KS903 acting on the D901.

According to the above configuration, the effect effect is improved by the action effect.

(14) In the game machine according to (12) or (13), there are a plurality of types of action effects acting on the specific display (for example, weak action effect, medium action effect, and strong action shown in FIG. 49 (C) and the like. There is an effect, etc.), and the rate of change to the second specific display differs depending on which of the action effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 49C, there is a change from no change). Since the determination ratios of the weak action effect, the medium action effect, and the strong action effect are different in the case of (weak change, medium change, or strong change), the second action effect depends on which button or the like action effect is executed. The rate of change to the specific display is different).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the action effect.

(15) In any of the game machines (12) to (14) above, there are a plurality of types of action effects acting on the specific display (for example, the weak action effect and the medium action effect shown in FIG. 49 (C). There are a plurality of types of display modes of the specific display after the change (for example, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904 shown in FIGS. 47 and 54 to 60). , Large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc.), and the ratio of which change to the specific display differs depending on which of the action effects is executed (for example). , As shown in FIG. 49 (C), there are weak action effect and medium action in the case of weak change (1 step change), medium change (2 step change), and strong change (3 step change). Since the determination ratios of the effect and the strong effect are different, the ratio of weak change, medium change, and strong change is different depending on which button or other action effect is executed. For example, before the change In the case of the small button (white) D901, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (white) D902 when the weak change is executed, and the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (white) D901 when the medium change is executed. It changes to (red) D903, and when a strong change is executed, the small button (white) D901 changes to stick D904. Therefore, which specific display is used depending on which button or other action effect is executed. The rate of change may be different).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the action effect.

(16) In any of the game machines (12) to (15), the detection means has a plurality of types (for example, push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A, etc.), and corresponds to the specific display after the change. Execute the operation effect detected by the detection means (for example, as shown in FIG. 59, execute the operation effect detected by the push button 9031B corresponding to the large button (white) D902 after the change, and show in FIG. 55. As described above, the operation effect detected by the push button 9031B corresponding to the large button (red) D903 after the change is executed, and as shown in FIGS. 57 and 60, the stick controller 9031A corresponding to the stick D904 after the change executes the operation effect. (The detected motion effect may be executed).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which operation means the specific display corresponds to.

(17) In any of the gaming machines (12) to (16), the specific display executing means has a non-valid period of detection by the detecting means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60). ), The specific display is displayed in an manner indicating that it is in the non-valid period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 60, a small button on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed (for example). (White) D901, large button (white) D902 on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed, large button (red) D903 on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed, and stick D904 on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed are displayed). ..

According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that the period is non-valid.

(18) In any of the gaming machines (12) to (17), the specific display executing means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo-continuous fluctuations). The specific display may be displayed over a plurality of variable displays, and the specific display may be displayed over a plurality of variable displays by pre-reading) and may be changed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation over a plurality of variable displays.

(19) A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect) foretelling that any of the game machines (12) to (18) is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. , Countdown effect, character drop effect, etc.), the action effect acting on the specific display is executed by executing the advance notice effect, and the second specific effect is executed by executing the action effect. The display may change.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for a specific advance notice effect.

(20) In any of the game machines (12) to (19) above, the setting state related to the effect is set to the first state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is disabled) or the second state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is disabled). Setting means that can be set to the state in which the auto button function is enabled (for example, the auto button setting process shown in FIG. 61) and a specific effect (for example, button notice) when the effect execution condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the operation of the push button 9031B in the effects A to C and the decision button effect, it is possible to execute a display that reduces the scale of the gauge display, a notice display, a pass / fail display, etc.). The specific effect executing means (for example, the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 44) is provided, and the specific effect executing means executes the effect in the first state based on the detection result of the detection means. While the specific effect can be executed assuming that the condition is satisfied, in the second state, the specific effect can be executed assuming that the effect execution condition is satisfied regardless of the detection result of the detection means (for example, the auto button function). When is enabled, even if the push button 9031B is not operated, the notice display, the pass / fail display, the display that reduces the scale of the gauge display, etc. are performed), the setting means is While the variable display is being executed, the setting can be changed from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the detection means (for example, a portion for executing the processes of steps S907103 to S907104 in FIG. 61). May be good.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a figure which shows the hit type table. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot determination table and jackpot type determination table. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern table used for determining a variation pattern in a tabular form. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 1st information and the 2nd information. It is a figure which shows the mode of the variation display. It is a timing chart of the symbol display pattern at the time of non-reach off. It is a timing chart of the symbol display pattern at the time of SP reach big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol variation start processing. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation of a decorative pattern and each notice production. It is a figure which shows the production execution example. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation of a decorative pattern and each notice production. It is a figure which shows the production execution example. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation of a decorative pattern and each notice production. It is a figure which shows the production execution example. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to another aspect. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for a game counted on the side of a main board. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of a variation category and variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the jackpot type determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the configuration example of the data holding area for effect control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning a prize determination process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a start winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the selection example of the variation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variable category determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of a button development effect category and a button development effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a button development effect decision process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the decision ratio of a button development effect. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of the button development effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing explaining various periods in button development production, and the specific flow of button development production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the flow of concrete button development production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the flow of concrete button development production. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an auto button setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display mode at the time of setting the function of an auto button to enable or disable. It is explanatory drawing which shows the comparative example of the automatic continuous hitting by a long press operation, and the automatic repeated hitting by an auto button function.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be another gaming machine such as a coin gaming machine or a slot machine, and a game capable of playing a game. Any gaming machine may be used as long as it is a machine.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a hit type table.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine in which a gaming ball as a gaming medium is driven into a gaming area 7 to play a game. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided in the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including (excluding board 6). In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into a game area.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 3, a surplus ball receiving plate 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball, and the like are provided. Further, a game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

The member forming the surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 4 is formed in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, the central portion of the lower plate) on the upper surface of the lower plate body, and is formed by the player. A stick controller 122 that can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front-back, left-right) is attached. The stick controller 122 is designated by a player performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger) while the player holds the operating rod of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 125 (see FIG. 3) capable of instructing operation is provided, and inside the operation stick of the stick controller 122, a trigger sensor 121 (FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instructing operation by pushing / pulling the trigger button 125 or the like See) is built-in. Further, an inclination direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting an inclination operation with respect to the operation stick is provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 122. Further, the stick controller 122 has a built-in vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

On the member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3, for example, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 122) on the upper surface of the upper plate main body. A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) that detects a player's operation action performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be moved to either the left or right side of the upper plate or the lower plate while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not be in a vertical positional relationship, but may be, for example, in a horizontal positional relationship. As the operating means, other operating means such as a lever switch and a jog dial may be provided.

Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 is provided as a display means capable of variablely displaying (also referred to as variable display) an effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each. The effect symbol as the identification information is composed of numerical information (for example, numbers) as the first information and decorative information (for example, characters) as the second information. The display mode of the first identification information and the second identification information changes in response to the variable display. On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, there is a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a that variablely displays the first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them. A second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b that variablely displays the second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each is provided.

Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is composed of a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 9 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and on the display screen, an effect symbol display area for performing a variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is provided. Be done. In the effect symbol display area, for example, a symbol display area for variable display of three decorative (effect) effect symbols, left, middle, and right, is formed.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display (variable display unit). I have something to do.

Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on a main board (game control board). The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8b is the second. 2 When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

More specifically, in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting condition or the second starting condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first starting winning opening 13). Or, after passing through the second start winning opening 14 (including winning), the change display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, the change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). It is started based on the establishment of the state where the display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. To do. In addition, the passing of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through a pre-determined area such as a winning opening or a gate as a winning area, and the concept includes that the game ball has entered (winned) in the winning opening. Is. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

When the jackpot display result (big hit symbol) as a specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, or when the jackpot display result (big hit symbol) as a specific display result is displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. When the derivation display is performed, the effect display device 9 also derivates and displays the jackpot display result (combination of jackpot symbols) as the specific display result. When the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display in this way, it is controlled to the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) as an advantageous state in which an advantageous value (advantageous value) is given to the player.

Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). Stopped, rocked, scaled or deformed in a state that matches (combination of symbols), or multiple symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. Then, the effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called a reach effect.

Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 form a part of the jackpot combination, the variable display of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continues. The display state, or the display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. In other words, the reach means a state in which the identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least a part of the variable display areas is in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed in a state in which the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area, for example. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

The display effect in the reach state is the reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during reach, unusual effects may be performed with lamps and sounds. This production is called reach production. Further, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect symbol or the like)) can be displayed, or a display mode (for example, color) of a background image of the effect display device 9 can be displayed. ) May be changed. The change in the display of the character and the display mode of the background is called the reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is more likely to occur than in a normal reach. Such a special reach is called super reach.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a.

Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, the game ball can win the second starting winning opening 14 (it becomes easier to win the starting winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win in the second starting winning opening 14 than in the first starting winning opening 13. Further, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, the game ball does not win the second starting winning opening 14. Therefore, when the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, the game ball is more likely to win the first starting winning opening 13 than the second starting winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it may be difficult to win a prize, but it may be possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize). Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 18b composed of four indicators that display the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second hold storage number. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further, above the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first holding storage number (holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory. ) Is provided as a first special symbol hold storage display 18a composed of four displays. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

The game machine is a ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball striking handle 5 and launches the game ball into the game area 7 by using the rotational force of the drive motor. ) Is provided. The game ball launched from the hit ball launcher enters the game area 7 through a ball hitting rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends and the first (1), the first special symbol display 8a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends and the second 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variation display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and the variation display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect symbol reminiscent of the jackpot on the effect display device 9. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

Further, at the lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, a hold storage display unit (total hold storage display unit) that displays the total number of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number (total hold storage number) is displayed. , Hold display area, not shown). In the total hold storage display unit, as the hold storage display, the number of hold storage images can be specified by, for example, the number of displayed images of a predetermined image (by displaying one hold storage image corresponding to each of the hold storage information). Specify the number of pending memories.) Is displayed. By providing the total hold storage display unit that displays the total number in this way, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that do not satisfy the start condition of the variable display. In each of the first special symbol hold storage display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and the effect display device 9, the light emitting display and the image display for indicating the number of hold storages are hold display or hold. It is called a memory display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 23.

In the jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 20 repeatedly controls the open state and the closed state repeatedly. In the repetitive continuous control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 20 is open is called a round. As a result, the repetitive continuous control is also called round control. In the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot types are provided, and when it is decided to make a jackpot, one of the jackpot types is selected.

On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variablely displaying normal symbols that can identify each of them is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9 in a variable manner. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is closed for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time, which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes from to an open state that is advantageous for the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1.

Further, an accessory 12 is provided above the effect display device 9. The accessory 12 is located between the game board 6 and the effect display device 9, and the position can be displaced by the accessory motor 17. The accessory 12 is usually located in a place that is difficult for the player to see, and moves to a position that is visible to the player (for example, a position in front of the effect display device 9) when a predetermined effect is executed.

At the bottom of the game board 6, there is an out opening 26 in which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in. Further, four speakers 27 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right upper parts and the lower left and right lower parts on the outside of the game area 7. A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7.

In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a “card unit”) that enables ball lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

In the hit type table of FIG. 2, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the base after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the number of times of opening in the jackpot ( The number of rounds) and the opening time of each round are shown.

Specifically, in the jackpot game state, after the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened, the end condition of the predetermined open state (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or The state is closed when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is satisfied (opening end condition). Then, when the opening end condition is satisfied, the continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the jackpot game state reaches the predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (final round).

Of the "big hits", the probabilistic state is a state in which after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, there is a higher probability that the special gaming state will be determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state (normal gaming state that is not the probabilistic state). The type of jackpot that shifts to (abbreviation for probability fluctuation state, also called high probability state) is called "probability variation jackpot". Further, in the present embodiment, as the special gaming state, when the fluctuation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is controlled to the time reduction state which is shorter than the non-time reduction state in association with the probability variation state. There is. It should be noted that the special gaming state may be controlled to a time saving state independently of the probability change state.

In this way, by shifting to the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, so that when the time saving state is reached, an effective start winning prize is likely to occur and a big hit game may be performed. Increase. Of the "big hits", the type of big hit that does not shift to the probabilistic state after being controlled to the big hit game state of 15 rounds is called "normal big hit".

Further, as a special gaming state, the frequency with which the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 15 is increased by increasing the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened in association with the probability change state or the time saving state. It may be controlled to the electric chew support control state that facilitates (higher approach, higher frequency) winning of the variable winning ball device 15. Since the electric chew support control state is a high base state as described later, it is mainly referred to as a high base state in the following description.

Here, the electric chew support control will be described. The electric chew support control includes control that shortens the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) so that the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), and the normal symbol. Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol will be a hit symbol (normal symbol probability variation control), control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. Control (control to increase the number of times of opening) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is higher than when the control is not performed, so that the winning frequency to the second starting winning opening 14 is high. Is increased, and it becomes easier for the game ball to start and win a prize (it becomes easier to satisfy the execution conditions of the variable display in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9). As a result of this control, the frequency of winning the second start winning opening 14 increases, so that the gaming state in which the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the frequency of execution of the variation display of the second special symbol increases.

The state in which the winning frequency to the second starting winning opening 14 is increased by the electric chew support control (high frequency state) is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out as prize balls according to the winning to the number of shot balls. Since the "base" is in a higher state than when the control is not performed, it is called a "high base state". When such control is not performed, it is called a "low base state". Further, such a control is a control for facilitating the winning of the variable winning ball device 15, that is, the variable winning ball device 15 by supporting the winning with the electric tulip, and is called "electric chew support control".

In this embodiment, "high probability state (probability change state)" and "low probability state (non-probability change state)" are used as terms indicating a state of jackpot probability, and as a term indicating a combination of base states. , "High base state (electric chew support control state)" and "low base state (non-electric chew support control state)" are used.

Further, in this embodiment, as terms indicating a combination of a jackpot probability state and a base state, "low probability low base state", "low probability high base state", and "high probability high base state" are used. Use. The "low probability low base state" is a state indicating that the jackpot probability state is a low probability state and the base state is a low base state. The "low probability high base state" is a state indicating that the jackpot probability state is a low probability state and the base state is a high base state. The "high probability high base state" is a state indicating that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state and the base state is a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 2, as the 15-round jackpot, a plurality of types of jackpots, a normal jackpot and a probabilistic jackpot, are provided. The normal jackpot is a jackpot controlled into a non-probability change state, a time saving state, and a high base state (low probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds jackpot game state. In the normal jackpot, the condition that the non-probability state continues for a period until the next jackpot occurs, the time saving state and the high base state are executed a predetermined number of times that the fluctuation display is executed 100 times, and the next jackpot It continues for a period until the earlier condition, which is the condition until the occurrence of the above, is satisfied. In addition, the normal jackpot may be controlled so as to be a jackpot controlled in a non-probability change state, a non-time saving state, and a non-electric chew support control state (low probability low base state).

The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to shift to a probability variation state, a time saving state, and a high base state (high probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds jackpot game state. In the probability variation jackpot, the condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) and the effect control board. Note that FIG. 3 also shows a payout control board 37 and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit. Includes 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer having a ROM 54 and a RAM 55 built-in. The game control microcomputer 560 also has a built-in random number circuit 503 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by the hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or all thereof is backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, etc.) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or processes) the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56). Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on a substrate other than the main substrate 31.

The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variation display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and is generated at random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random number value based on the start winning time when the numerical data is read (extracted). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503.

Further, an input driver circuit 58 that gives detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. In addition, the output circuit 59 that drives the solenoid 16 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms the large winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also main. It is mounted on the substrate 31.

Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a for variable display of special symbols, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10 for variable display of normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol holding storage display 18b, and the normal symbol holding storage display 41 is performed.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 100, a ROM 102, a RAM 103, a VDP 109, an I / O port unit 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 100. The VDP 109 cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 100 to control the display of the effect display device 9.

The effect control microcomputer 100 is an effect control command for instructing the effect content from the game control microcomputer 560 via a relay board 77 that allows signals to pass in only one direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. Is received to control the variation display of the effect display device 9, and the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side is controlled via the lamp driver board 35, and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Performs various production controls such as controlling the sound output of.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 transmits an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 121 to the input port of the I / O port unit 105. Enter via. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port of the I / O port unit 105. To do. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 to the I / O port unit 105. Enter through the port. Further, the effect control CPU 101 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port of the I / O port unit 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives the accessory motor 17 via a motor drive circuit (not shown) to operate the accessory 12.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 4, the type of random number, the update range, the use, and the addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: A random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (type, normal jackpot, or one of probabilistic jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2 (MR2): Determines the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for determining the fluctuation pattern type). (4) Random 3 (MR3): The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined (for determining the fluctuation pattern). (5) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for determining a normal symbol hit). (6) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4).

In this embodiment, as the jackpot in the specific gaming state, a plurality of types of a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot are included. Therefore, when a big hit is determined based on the value of the big hit judgment random number (random R), the big hit type is one of these big hits based on the value of the big hit type judgment random number (random 1). Determined by type. Further, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined at the same time based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). Therefore, random number 1 is also a random number for determining a jackpot symbol.

Further, as for the fluctuation pattern, first, the fluctuation pattern type is determined by using the fluctuation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and any of the variation pattern types included in the determined fluctuation pattern type using the fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3). Determine the fluctuation pattern. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type. The fluctuation pattern type is sometimes called a fluctuation type.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is classified into a normal variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type without reach, and a reach variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type with reach.

Such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type is different between the time saving state and the non-time saving state when the display result is out of order. When is, the fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the case where the time is not shortened. For example, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of a predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than that in the non-time-shortening state in order to shorten the average time of the fluctuation time as compared with the non-time-saving state, or the fluctuation pattern type is the most variable. The rate at which the variation pattern type with the shortest time is selected is high, and even when the reach type is selected, the rate at which the normal reach variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the variation pattern types is set to be high. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time becomes shorter than when the time is not shortened.

It should be noted that such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio differs depending on whether the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed fluctuation is equal to or more than a predetermined number and less than a predetermined number. When the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the holding number reduction control is executed in which the variable display time is shortened as compared with the case where the number of reserved storages of each special symbol is less than a predetermined number. You may try to do it. For example, in the hold number reduction control state, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern type having a short fluctuation display time such as the normal fluctuation pattern type is selected is set to be higher than in the hold number reduction control state. , The average time of the variable display time may be shortened as compared with the case where the hold number reduction control state is not performed. Further, in the hold number shortening control, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be shortened even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected as compared with the case where the hold number shortening control state is not performed.

Further, the variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of a two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal time (non-probability change time) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state) and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in the probability change state.

Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 5 (A) is set as a jackpot determination value in the normal jackpot determination table, and is described in the right column of FIG. 5 (A) in the probability variation jackpot determination table. Each numerical value is set as a jackpot judgment value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change becomes the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at normal time (referred to as the jackpot judgment value at normal time or the first jackpot judgment value) at the time of probability change. Due to the addition of the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number (10 times the number) of jackpot judgment values (referred to as the probability variation jackpot judgment value or the second jackpot judgment value) is set. .. As a result, it is determined that the probability change state is a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. 5 (A). If any of the indicated jackpot determination values is matched, it is determined to make a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 5 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

5 (B) and 5 (C) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. 5B shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the hold memory (also referred to as the first hold memory) based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 13 (variation display of the first special symbol). This is the first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) used for (when performed). FIG. 5C shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the hold memory (also referred to as the second hold memory) based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening 14 (the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed. This is the second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for (when performed).

Each of the first and second special symbol jackpot type determination tables of FIGS. 5 (B) and 5 (C) is used for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol. Based on the random number (random 1) of, the type of jackpot is determined to be either "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot", and is referred to for determining the jackpot symbol.

In the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (B), the numerical value compared with the value of random 1 and the determination value corresponding to each of "normal jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" (big hit type determination). Value) is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (C), the numerical value compared with the value of random 1 and the determination value corresponding to each of "normal jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" (big hit type determination). Value) is set.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 (B) and 5 (C), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "3" of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "probability variation jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "7" of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Using the jackpot type determination table, the CPU 56 determines as the jackpot type the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 1 value matches, and also determines the jackpot symbol in which the random 1 value matches as the jackpot symbol. To do. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

The first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (C) have the same ratio determined for the probability variation jackpot. In such a case, it is not necessary to divide the jackpot type determination table between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, when selecting the jackpot type from among a plurality of types of jackpots having different maximum number of rounds in the jackpot game state as the jackpot type, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5C is shown in FIG. It may be set so that the ratio of selecting the jackpot type having a large number of rounds is higher than that of the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of (B). In this way, in a high base state, the selection of the type of jackpot is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (C) may have a higher rate of determination of the probability variation jackpot than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (B). .. By doing so, the rate of the probability variation jackpot can be made higher in the variation display of the second special symbol than in the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table may have a higher rate of determination of the probability variation jackpot than the second special symbol jackpot type determination table.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a variation pattern table used for selecting and determining variation patterns of special symbols and effect symbols in the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a variation pattern table used for determining a variation pattern in a tabular format.

In FIG. 6, (a) shows a table for determining when the normal state is out, and FIG. 6 (b) shows a table for determining when the time saving state is out. Further, (c) shows a normal jackpot determination table, and (d) shows a probability variation jackpot determination table. Each of the determination tables of FIGS. 6 (a) to 6 (d) is stored in the ROM 54, is selected according to the gaming state, and is used for determining (determining) the variation pattern type and the variation pattern.

The determination table shown in FIG. 6 includes a variation pattern type determination table showing the relationship between the random 2 and the variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination table showing the relationship between the random 3 and the variation patterns belonging to each type for each variation pattern type. Including.

In the column of "variation pattern type" or "variation pattern" in each table of FIG. 6, "normal" or "normal variation" indicates a normal variation pattern that does not reach.

Further, the "normal reach" in each table of FIG. 6 shows a fluctuation pattern of the normal reach that does not perform a particularly flashy effect when the reach state is reached. "Super reach" (SP reach) indicates a variation pattern in which a reach effect is performed by displaying a special effect image when the reach state is reached.

Further, as described above, "super reach" is a fluctuation pattern in which the ratio of selection when a big hit is made is higher than that of "normal reach", and the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, the "super reach" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is longer than that of the "normal reach" (for example, the normal reach is 10 seconds and the super reach is 50 to 80 seconds). In addition, four types of fluctuation patterns are set for the super reach, and the degree of expectation of a big hit (a big hit) is such that the first super reach <the second super reach <the third super reach <the fourth super reach. (Possibility) is high.

The "expectation degree" is a concept including an expectation degree for a big hit, an expectation degree for a probability change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation for a big hit (also referred to as reliability) is the degree of expectation (the ratio of a big hit) that becomes a big hit when each reach fluctuation pattern is selected. For example, the reach fluctuation is performed 100 times. If the jackpot is 60 times, the expectation for the jackpot is 60% (the appearance rate (probability) of the jackpot is 60%). Further, the degree of expectation for the probability change means the degree of expectation (ratio of probability change) to shift to the probability change state.

The fluctuation pattern shown in the deviation time determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of “off”. The fluctuation pattern shown in the normal jackpot determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of "normal jackpot". The variation pattern shown in the probability variation jackpot determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is the display result of "probability variation jackpot".

Based on this information, for example, the fluctuation pattern of "fourth super reach (80 seconds)" shown in the "variation pattern" column of FIG. 6A has a fluctuation time of 80, which is an out-of-order display result. It is shown to be a "fourth superreach variation pattern" executed in seconds.

In the table of FIG. 6, the columns described as "random 2 range" and "variation pattern type" function as a variation pattern type determination table unit showing the relationship between "random 2 range" and "variation pattern type". It is a column to show. For example, in FIG. 6A as an example, all the values of random 2 (1-251) are plural for each of a plurality of fluctuation pattern types such as "normal", "normal reach", and "super reach". It is divided into the numerical range of. For example, in FIG. 6A as an example, if the value of random 2 extracted at a predetermined timing matches any of the determination values assigned to 140 to 229 among the random values of 1 to 251. , It is decided to set "normal reach" as the fluctuation pattern type.

Further, in the table of FIG. 6, the columns described as "random 3 range" and "variation pattern" indicate the function as a variation pattern determination table unit showing the relationship between the "random 3 range" and the "variation pattern". It is a column. The fluctuation patterns shown corresponding to each type of the fluctuation pattern type determination table are the fluctuation patterns belonging to each type. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, the fluctuation patterns belonging to the type of "super reach" are "first super reach", "second super reach", "third super reach", and "first super reach". 4 Super Reach ".

All the values of random 3 (1-220) are divided into a plurality of numerical ranges and assigned to each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each fluctuation pattern type. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, when it is decided to use the fluctuation pattern type of "super reach", the random 3 extracted at a predetermined timing is 1 out of the random values of 1 to 220. When it matches with any of the determination values assigned to ~ 70, it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is “first super reach (50 seconds)”.

When the variation display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out of alignment, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern. When the variation display result is out of alignment in the non-time saving state, the out-of-time determination table in FIG. 6A is selected. On the other hand, in the time saving state, when the variation display result is out of order, the time saving state out of time determination table shown in FIG. 6B is selected. By using the determination tables shown in FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b), the reach ratio is kept constant when the normal state is out of the normal state and when the time saving state is out of the range, regardless of the number of holdings.

When the variation display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit regardless of whether the time is shortened or not, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern. When the variation display result is a normal jackpot, the normal jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 6C is selected. When the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot regardless of whether or not the time is shortened, the probabilistic jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 6D is selected.

In the time saving state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 6 (b), the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation is set shorter than that of the normal state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 6 (a). Then, in the time saving state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 6 (b), the fluctuation time is shorter than the reach variation (including the normal reach variation and the super reach variation) as compared with the normal state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 6 (a). The ratio determined for normal fluctuation (non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation (variation that results in out-of-reach display result without reaching)) is high, and the ratio determined for reach fluctuation with a longer fluctuation time than normal fluctuation is low. The data is set.

As a result, the rate of selection of fluctuation patterns with shorter fluctuation times is higher in the non-time saving state than in the non-time saving state (normal state), so that in the non-time saving state, the non-time saving state is selected. The fluctuation display is performed with a fluctuation time that is shorter on average than in the case of. By selecting the determination table in this way, the time saving state can be realized. Further, by setting the normal fluctuation so that the fluctuation time is shorter in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, it is possible to shorten the pending digestion in the time-saving state.

In the judgment tables of FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b) selected when the data is out of alignment, the data is set so that the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in a high-low relationship such that normal reach> super reach. Has been done. On the other hand, in the judgment tables of FIGS. 6 (c) and 6 (d) selected when a big hit occurs, the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in a high-low relationship such as normal reach <super reach. The data is set. As a result, when a big hit occurs, the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach (the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than that of the case of the loss, so that the reach of the super reach is increased. By producing the effect, the player's expectation can be increased.

Further, in the judgment table of FIG. 6 (d) selected when the probability variation big hit is obtained among the big hits, the normal reach is achieved as compared with the judgment table of FIG. 6 (c) selected when the normal big hit is obtained among the big hits. On the other hand, the data is set so that the ratio of selecting the type of super reach effect is high. As a result, when it becomes a probabilistic jackpot, the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach (the proportion occupied by the reach effect of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than that of the normal jackpot. By performing the reach production of the reach, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player for the probable change jackpot.

In addition, such a fluctuation pattern is when the total reserved storage number (total value) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be variable-displayed is a predetermined number or more (for example, the total reserved storage number is 3 or more). By setting the selection ratio to be different depending on whether the number is less than the predetermined number, when the total number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the fluctuation time is compared with the case where the total number of reserved storages is less than the predetermined number. May be executed to reduce the number of holds. However, even under the condition that the hold number shortening control is executed (for example, the total number of hold storages is 3 or more), the expectation for reach is maintained by keeping the ratio of reach (including normal reach and super reach) constant. Further, it is also possible to execute the hold number time reduction control so that the fluctuation time is not shortened only in the super reach among the reach. Further, the hold number time reduction control may be feasible by making the normal fluctuation with a short fluctuation time selected at a high rate, or may be feasible by shortening the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern itself. The combination may be used.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the game control microcomputer 560, as shown in FIG. 7, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the game control state.

The main commands in FIG. 7 will be described. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating the variation pattern of the effect symbol to be variablely displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (corresponding to each variation pattern XX). ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. 6, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls to start the variable display of the effect symbol.

The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are display result designation commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the big hit type.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (symbol confirmation designation command) for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

The commands A001 to A002 (H) are jackpot start designation commands for designating the start of the jackpot game state for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

The command A1XX (H) is a designated command indicating that the large winning opening is open for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening the large winning opening, which indicates after opening (closing) the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands for designating the end of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

The command A401 (H) is a first start prize designation command for designating that there was a first start prize. The command A402 (H) is a second start prize designation command that specifies that there was a second start prize.

The command B000 (H) is a normal state specification command that specifies that the game state is a normal state (low probability state). The command B001 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the time saving state (high base state). The command B002 (H) is a probability change state designation command that specifies that the game state is a probability change state (high probability state).

The command C0XX (H) is a total hold storage number designation command indicating the total hold storage number. The command C100 (H) is a total hold storage number subtraction designation command indicating that the total hold storage number is subtracted by 1. In this embodiment, the total reserved memory number designation command is executed at the time of starting a game ball to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (for example, when executing the start opening switch passing process described later). , Is sent to the effect control microcomputer 100. Further, the total hold storage number subtraction designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 100 at the start of the variation display (for example, when the special symbol variation display processing process described later is executed). The total hold storage specification command and the hold storage number subtraction specification command may also be used. For example, the total hold storage number specification command may be used as a command that can specify the hold storage number after subtraction. It should be noted that the effect control microcomputer 100 transmits a command capable of specifying the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, respectively, not as the total reserved storage number, and the effect control microcomputer 100 transmits the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. The total value of and may be specified as the total number of pending storages.

The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are the results of winning judgments such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, and variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. This is an effect control command that indicates the content. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. Further, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value range the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, the type of the jackpot, and the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning. .. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating the type of the big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 100. A value that specifies a range of determination values as a determination result of the variation pattern type is set in the EXT data of the variation type command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit and the type of the big hit at the time of starting winning, based on the value set in the symbol designation command. The fluctuation pattern type can be recognized based on the fluctuation type command.

Next, a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing data such as random numbers (holding storage data) corresponding to the holding storage on the game control microcomputer 560 side will be described. The hold storage buffer is provided in the RAM 55.

In the first hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the first hold storage number (4 in this example) is secured. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, a random number for determining a jackpot, which is a hardware random number (random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type, which is a software random number (random 1), and a random number for determining a variable pattern type. (Random 2) and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (random number 3) are stored.

Based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, the CPU 56 extracts such random values from the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and obtains them. The process of saving (storing) in the storage area in the 1-hold storage buffer or the 2nd hold storage buffer is executed. Specifically, these random values are extracted and stored in the first hold storage buffer based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Further, these random values are extracted and stored in the second hold storage buffer based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 14.

The storage of information regarding the start winning prize as described above in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer may be indicated as "hold storage". The random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) and the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3) are not extracted and stored in the storage area at the time of starting winning, but the variation pattern setting process (special) described later. It may be extracted at the start of fluctuation of the symbol).

As will be described later, the data stored in the hold storage buffer in this way is read at the start winning prize and used for the look-ahead notice effect, and is read at the start of the variable display and used for the variable display.

When there is a start prize in the first start prize opening 13 or the second start prize opening 14, it is called a symbol designation command, a variable type command, a first (second) start prize designation command, and a total reserved memory number designation command. Such a command indicating the determination result of the start winning determination process is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In the start winning prize reception command buffer provided in the RAM 103 of the effect control microcomputer 100, the received symbol designation command, variation type command, first (second) start winning prize designation command, and total hold storage number designation command are stored. A storage area for storing data that can identify the received command is secured so that various commands such as the above can be stored in association with each other.

In this embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect symbol performed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, and the effect symbol variation display operation and reach. It is composed of data showing the control contents of various production operations such as the production display operation in the production and the like, or various production operations that do not involve the variable display of the production symbol. Further, the advance notice effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content of the effect operation that is the advance notice effect executed in response to the advance notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data and the like indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically interrupted at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) and the timer interrupt process is executed. By doing so, various game controls can be executed.

In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, initialization processing at normal time, game state recovery processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (initial setting of random number circuit 503), random number update processing for display (variation pattern). Random number update processing for initial value (update processing for initial value of the count value of the random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination) and the like are executed.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt processing of steps S (hereinafter, simply referred to as “S”) 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (S20). Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their states are determined (switch processing: S21). ..

Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 41 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, control to output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. To execute.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each judgment random number such as a normal symbol hit judgment random number and a big hit type judgment random number used for game control is performed (judgment random number update process: S23). .. The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S24, S25).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the grand prize opening in a predetermined order, and the special symbol process is performed. The value of the flag is updated according to the game state.

Next, a normal symbol process process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order, and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state. Update accordingly.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: S28). Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (S30).

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to turning on / off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (S31: output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting the special symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( S32).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). S33). Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends. With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated at predetermined time intervals.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, the start port switch passage process is executed (S312). Then, depending on the internal state, any of the processes S300 to S307 is performed.

In the game control microcomputer 560, as described above, the RAM 55 stores the hold storage data (first hold storage data) such as the jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start prize to the first start winning opening 13. The first hold storage buffer to be stored, and the second hold storage buffer for storing the hold storage data (second hold storage data) such as the jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start prize to the second start winning opening 14. Is provided. In each of these hold storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of storages of each hold storage (4 in this example) is secured.

In the start port switch passing process, if the first start port switch 13a is turned on, the number of stored first reserved storage data is the number of stored data on condition that the first reserved storage number does not reach the upper limit value (for example, 4). Numerical data (for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination) from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number by increasing the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting Random numbers) are extracted, and the process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total hold storage counter is increased by 1, and the process of storing (storing) the data indicating "first" in the hold specific area corresponding to the value of the total hold storage counter after the total is executed. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 14a is turned on, the second hold storage number is counted on the condition that the second hold storage number does not reach the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the hold storage counter is increased by 1, and numerical data (for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and a random number for determining a variation pattern) are extracted from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number. Then, the process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total hold storage counter is increased by 1, and the process of storing (storing) the data indicating "second" in the hold specific area corresponding to the value of the total hold storage counter after the total is executed.

The processes of S300 to S307 are as follows. The special symbol normal process (S300) is a process of determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and determining the type of big hit when the display result is a big hit. The variation pattern setting process (S301) determines the variation pattern (determines the variation pattern using the variation pattern type determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number), and clocks the variation time according to the determined variation pattern. This is a process for controlling the start of timekeeping of the variable time timer for the purpose.

The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process of controlling the transmission of the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The special symbol changing process (S303) is a process of advancing the process to the special symbol stop process when the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses. The special symbol stop process (S304) displays the fluctuation on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b when the passage of the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is timed by the fluctuation time timer. It is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying the stopped symbol.

The large winning opening pre-opening process (S305) is a process of controlling the opening of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 20 according to the type of big hit. The process of opening the large winning opening (S306) confirms the control of transmitting the effect control command for the round display effect during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 100 and the establishment of the closing condition of the large winning opening. This is a process for performing processing and the like. If the conditions for closing the large winning opening are satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the large winning opening pre-opening process (S305). When all the rounds are completed, the process proceeds to the jackpot end process (S307). The jackpot end process (S307) is a process of performing control or the like for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended.

Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initial setting the timer for determining the effect control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S701). ). After that, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets data such as a flag capable of identifying what the received effect control command is. Processing (for example, processing for storing data that can identify the received command in various command storage areas provided in the RAM 103) and the like are performed (command analysis processing: S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect control process process (S705). In the effect control process process, in order to perform various effects such as variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 according to the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S704, the current control of each process according to the control state is performed. Select the process corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) and execute the effect control.

Next, the random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 100 (SR1-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-2 for determining the middle stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-3 for determining the right stop symbol of the effect symbol). Etc.) is executed (S706) to update the count value of the counter for generating the random number. Each of such random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 is generated by the count of a random counter whose count value is updated by software, and each of them is cyclically updated within a predetermined range, and each of them is updated. It is used as a random number by being extracted at a predetermined timing.

Next, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (moving, erasing, etc. of the hold display) is executed (S707).

By executing such an effect control main process, the effect control microcomputer 100 transmits from the game control microcomputer 560 and responds to the effect control command received, the effect display device 9, various lamps, and the effect control computer 100. By controlling the effect devices such as the speakers 27L and 27R, various effect controls are performed according to the game state.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 101 executes the pre-reading effect process (S700) for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and selecting the type of the pre-reading effect, and then the value of the effect control process flag. Any one of S800 to S807 is performed according to the above.

In the effect control process process, the following processes are executed. In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbol, but the control related to the variation display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also controlled by the second special symbol. The control related to the variation display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of is also executed in one effect control process process.

The pre-reading effect processing (S700) is a process of determining pre-reading such as whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and determining the effect mode when executing the pre-reading effect. The look-ahead effect is a change in the special symbol based on the hold information (holding memory information) before the turn of the display (symbol change) of the special symbol arrives. It is a production technique that determines the content of the display and gives a notice at a stage before that what the variable display of the special symbol will be in the future. For example, when the hold information is a big hit, a big hit may occur later based on the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information before the variable display by the hold information is executed. A kind of effect such as giving a notice is performed as a look-ahead effect. Hereinafter, the variable display based on the hold information targeted for the look-ahead effect will be referred to as “target variable display”.

The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) is a process of confirming whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. If the variation pattern command is received, the process shifts to the effect symbol variation start processing.

The effect symbol variation start process (S801) is a process for controlling the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) to be started. The effect symbol changing process (S802) is a process for controlling the switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern. The effect symbol variation stop process (S803) is a process of stopping the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) and controlling to derive and display the display result (final stop symbol) of the variation display.

The jackpot display process (S804) is a process of performing display control such as control of displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a jackpot after the end of the fluctuation time. The process during the round (S805) is a process for controlling the display during the round. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not completed, the process proceeds to the round post-processing, and if the final round is completed, the process proceeds to the jackpot end process. The round post-processing (S806) is a process for controlling the display between rounds. When the round start condition is satisfied, the process shifts to the processing during the round. The jackpot end effect process (S807) is a process of performing display control in the effect display device 9 to notify the player that the jackpot game state has ended.

The effect control CPU 101 is a process stored in the ROM 102 from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display, and during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the big hit game state to the end of the big hit game state. The effect device (effect component) such as the effect display device 9 is controlled according to the process data set in the table.

The process table is composed of process timer setting values and data in which a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) are described. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, and controls to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

[Identification information]
Next, the identification information used in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the effect display device 9 variablely displays the effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them. The effect symbol as the identification information is composed of numerical information (numbers) as the first information and decorative information (characters) as the second information. The image showing the numbers as the first information and the image showing the characters as the second information are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis. The first information may be Chinese characters, English characters, predetermined marks, symbols, or the like. Further, the second information may be an effect display other than the character, and may be a decorative display that matches the motif of the first information.

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the relationship between the first information and the second information. As shown in FIG. 12, "character A" is associated with the number "1", "character B" is associated with the number "2", and the number "3" is associated with it. Then, "character C" is associated, "character D" is associated with the number "4", "character E" is associated with the number "5", and the number "character" is associated. "Character F" is associated with "6", "Character G" is associated with number "7", and "Character H" is associated with number "8". , "Character I" is associated with the number "9".

The identification information display patterns include a first display pattern that displays numerical information (numbers) without displaying decorative information (characters) and a second display pattern that displays numerical information (numbers) and decorative information (characters). Is provided. Numerical information (numbers) as the first information and decorative information (characters) as the second information change in the first display pattern or the second display pattern in the variable display, so that the display mode changes. ing. Changes in the display mode of the numbers as the first information and the characters as the second information in the variable display will be described below.

[About the display mode of variable display]
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a mode of variable display. In particular, FIG. 13 shows a display mode at the time of shortening fluctuation. At the time of shortened fluctuation, all three symbols start to fluctuate all at once, and all the symbols stop fluctuating all at once within a short fluctuation time. On the other hand, at the time of normal fluctuation, the fluctuation of the three symbols starts all at once, and the fluctuation is stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. At the time of shortening fluctuation, the same symbol stop order as at the time of normal fluctuation may be used, or the symbols may start moving one by one at the start of fluctuation.

FIG. 13 shows the passage of time in the variable display in the order of FIGS. 13 (a) to 13 (e). FIG. 13A shows a display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of fluctuation. The time when the fluctuation is started shown in FIG. 13A indicates a state in which the effect symbol is stopped and immediately before the fluctuation display is started. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, an effect symbol as identification information formed from numbers and characters is displayed. The effect symbol formed by the numbers and the characters is displayed in a wide display range with respect to the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, among numbers and characters, the character has a wider display range.

The effect symbol formed by the numbers and the characters as shown in FIG. 13 (a) becomes only the numbers as the symbol action at the time of variable disclosure as shown in FIG. 13 (b). As described above, at the start of the fluctuation, after the effect symbol starts to fluctuate downward, the fluctuation display by the number, which is the first display pattern, is started. In FIGS. 13 (a) to 13 (b), after performing an operation at the start of fluctuation such as enlargement of the character, the characters are erased, the numbers become larger than before the start of fluctuation, and only the downward numbers are used. The variable display is executed. FIG. 13C shows a display mode of the effect symbol during fluctuation. The down arrow shows how the numbers are fluctuating downwards.

FIG. 13D shows a symbol action when the variable display of the effect symbol is stopped. At the time of stopping the fluctuation, the operation of stopping the three numbers fluctuating at high speed at the stop position in the center of the display screen is executed. After that, the three numerical symbols move downward from the stop position of the symbols. As the variable stop symbol action at this time, the characters B, C, and H viewed the screen of the effect display device 9 from the front so as to push down the symbol at the stop position shown by the dotted line in FIG. 13 (e). An effect that is displayed so as to pop out from the depth direction of the time is executed. Along with the effect, the numbers are further moved downward and displayed in a reduced display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 13 (f), when the fluctuation is stopped, the effect symbol is displayed by the second display pattern composed of numbers and characters. Here, the display mode when changing from the second display pattern consisting of numbers and characters as the symbol action at the start of fluctuation to the first display pattern consisting only of numbers, and the first display consisting only of numbers as the symbol action at the stop of fluctuation. The display mode when changing from the pattern to the second display pattern composed of numbers and characters is different. For example, when the fluctuation starts, the character is enlarged and displayed forward and erased, and when the fluctuation is stopped, the character appears forward from the depth direction (rear) when the screen of the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front. The display mode differs depending on the movement of pushing down the number. In this way, numbers and characters can be preferably displayed.

The operation when the fluctuation is stopped differs depending on the characters A to I, but the operation when only the numbers are displayed at the start of the fluctuation may be common to all the symbols. In this way, at the start of fluctuation, the three symbols start to move at the same time, so that the symbol actions can be unified and the appearance can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, the size of the numbers when displayed by the second display pattern and the size of the numbers when displayed by the first display pattern are different. For example, the size of the numbers displayed at the start or stop of the fluctuation displayed by the second display pattern has a smaller display range than the size of the changing numbers displayed by the first display pattern. In this way, at the start of the fluctuation or at the stop of the fluctuation, the player can pay attention to the display mode consisting of the numbers and the characters, and during the fluctuation display, only the numbers are used in a display range larger than that at the time of the stop of the fluctuation. By executing the variable display, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the transition of the effect symbol during the variable display, and it is possible to preferably display the numbers and the characters.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, as a symbol action when the fluctuation is stopped, an effect of stopping the fluctuation display is executed by a pattern in which the character is displayed larger than the number by moving the number downward. In this way, the display mode when displaying the numbers and the characters can be made interesting, and the numbers and the characters can be displayed suitably.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variable display is stopped, the display is performed so that the character appears wider than the display range of the numbers before the stop. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the discomfort when changing from the first display pattern to the second display pattern. Therefore, numbers and characters can be preferably displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13 (d) and 13 (e), as a symbol action when the fluctuation is stopped, an effect of displaying the character so as to jump out from the depth direction when the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front is executed. Will be done. In this way, a powerful display using characters can be performed.

Further, there is a correspondence relationship between the numbers and the characters as shown in FIG. 12, and as shown in FIG. 13, the variable display is stopped in the pattern of displaying the characters corresponding to the numbers. By doing so, different characters will appear according to the numbers, so that the numbers and the characters can be preferably displayed.

[About the symbol display pattern when non-reach is off]
FIG. 14 is a timing chart of the symbol display pattern at the time of non-reach loss. The variation display shown in FIG. 13 is executed at the timing shown in FIG. At time t0, the variable display is started (see FIG. 13 (a)). Then, the action at the start of fluctuation is executed from time t0 to t1 (see FIG. 13B). In the action at the start of fluctuation, the effect symbol consisting of numbers and characters is only numbers, and the fluctuation display in which the numbers move downward is executed. Then, during the period of T1, the variation display using only numbers is executed (see FIG. 13C).

From t2 to t3 after T1, the symbol action when the fluctuation is stopped is executed (see FIGS. 13 (d) and 13 (e)). In the symbol action when the fluctuation is stopped, when the symbol displayed only by numbers moves below the stop position when the fluctuation is stopped, and the character sees the screen of the effect display device 9 from the front in the empty space. The effect of jumping forward from the depth direction of is executed. Also, in the symbol action when the fluctuation is stopped, the character is displayed larger than the number when the number moves downward. Then, at t3, the variable display is stopped by the second display pattern composed of numbers and characters (see FIG. 13 (f)).

As shown in FIG. 14, the first change effect of changing from numbers only to numbers and characters is executed as the action at the start of fluctuation, and the second change effect of changing from numbers and characters to only numbers is performed as the action at the start of fluctuation. Execute. The execution mode is different between the first modified effect and the second modified effect. In the variable stop symbol action executed as the first change effect, the character jumps forward from the depth direction when the screen of the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front, the numbers move downward, and the character is moved more than the numbers. In the change start symbol action, which is displayed in a large size and executed as the second change effect, the character is erased from the numbers and the character, and only the number displayed larger than before the change changes downward. In this way, numbers and characters can be preferably displayed.

[About the symbol display pattern at the time of SP reach jackpot]
Next, the symbol display pattern when super reach (SP reach) occurs and becomes a big hit will be described. FIG. 15 is a timing chart of the symbol display pattern at the time of SP reach jackpot. At time t0, the variable display is started. Then, the fluctuation start action is executed from time t0 to t1. In the action at the start of fluctuation, the effect symbol consisting of numbers and characters is only numbers, and the fluctuation display in which the numbers move downward is executed. After that, in the period of T1, the variation display using only numbers is executed.

After that, at t2, as a symbol action when the left symbol fluctuation is stopped, the effect symbol changes from the first display pattern consisting of only numbers to the second display pattern consisting of numbers and characters, and is temporarily stopped (the symbol does not stop completely). In addition, it will move slightly up and down). The movements of the numbers and the character at this time are the same as the above-mentioned action at the time of stopping the fluctuation. Then, in t3, as the action when the right symbol fluctuation is stopped, the effect symbol changes from the first display pattern consisting of only numbers to the second display pattern consisting of numbers and characters, and is in a temporarily stopped state. The movement of the numbers and the character at this time is the same as the above-mentioned action at the time of stopping the fluctuation.

Then, the reach formation action is executed from the state of t3 to t4. In the reach formation action, an effect of greatly moving the character displayed as the second display pattern is executed. For example, by executing the effect of rotating the character in the lateral direction after the reach state is reached, the effect of showing the front and back of the character is executed. It should be noted that the action of the character's reach formation action may be different for each character. Further, the movement of the character may be different depending on the degree of expectation of a big hit. Further, the number symbols may remain as they are at the stages of t2 and t3 until the reach state is reached, and the left and right number symbols (reach symbols) may be used as the second display pattern composed of numbers and characters at the timing of t4.

After that, the middle symbol scrolls at high speed from the normal reach effect executed only by the number symbol, and the reach develops to SP reach at t5. When developing into SP reach, the effect symbols indicated by numbers are displayed as small symbols in a reduced display mode at a corner (for example, the right corner) of the screen of the effect display device 9.

In the period in T2 after developing to SP reach, a small symbol action pattern is executed. During the period of the small symbol action pattern, the SP reach effect is executed, and the effect that the small symbol moves violently is executed. For example, in the small symbol action pattern, an effect in which the small symbol jumps up and down or an effect of rotating in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction may be executed according to the effect sound flowing in the SP reach effect. Then, at t6, the fact that the SP reach is completed and a big hit is displayed is displayed by a set of only numbers that are enlarged from the small symbols and have become the normal size.

The pattern of the small symbol action may be changed depending on the type of SP reach (first super reach to fourth super reach, etc.). Further, the operation of the small symbol may be different depending on the type of song played during SP reach. Further, the operation of the small symbol may be changed during the SP reach. In addition, the operation mode of the small symbol may be different depending on the degree of expectation of a big hit. Further, the small symbol may be displayed before the SP reach is developed, and the operation mode of the small symbol may be different between before and after the development of the SP reach depending on the type of the SP reach. In this way, the movement modes of the small symbols are diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

After that, at t7, an effect of returning from the background of the SP reach to the normal background is executed. Further, after that, until the symbol stops fluctuating and becomes a definite display (a state in which the symbol is completely stopped), the character is displayed from the first display pattern containing only numbers to the second display pattern consisting of numbers and characters. Performs the determined action. As the character determination operation, for example, an effect is executed in which the character signs a V sign and the number indicating the jackpot display result is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15, since the character moves significantly as an action at the time of reach formation, the movement of the character can be noticed, and the numbers and the character can be preferably displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, at the end of SP reach, the symbols are aligned only with numbers, and when the final display is performed after returning to the normal background, the numbers and characters are used for the determined operation. By doing so, it is possible to display the effect symbol suitable for each scene of the effect, and it is possible to preferably display the numbers and the characters.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, as the small symbol action pattern B, an effect of violently moving the small symbol according to the effect sound during SP reach is executed. In this way, the numbers as the small symbols displayed in a reduced size can be preferably displayed.

Before SP reach, the small symbol may not be displayed. Specifically, before developing into SP reach, an effect of simply making the reach out of reach with only numbers may be performed, and then when SP reach develops, the number symbols may be displayed as small symbols.

Next, a process for determining a symbol display pattern and the like will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the following process.

In the effect symbol variation start processing, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the variation display result is out of the question (S601). Whether or not it is determined to be out of order is determined by, for example, whether or not the display result 1 designated command is stored in the display result designated command storage area. If it is determined to be out of order, it is confirmed whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received as the fluctuation pattern command (S602). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received is determined, for example, by the data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

When it is determined that a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received, the display result of the missing symbol that does not reach is determined as the final stop of the effect symbol by using the data table for determining the missing symbol stored in the ROM 102 (S604). , S616. In the data table for determining the out-of-order symbols, the numerical data of SR1-1 to SR1-3 are associated with each of the plurality of types of effect symbols.

In the processing of S604, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and the data table for determining the missing symbol is used, and the symbols corresponding to the extracted numerical data are left and middle, respectively. ， Determined as a combination of stop symbols that will result in variable display of the effect symbol on the right. In this way, when determining the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number coincides with the combination of jackpot symbols by chance, it is corrected so as to be the combination of out-of-reach symbols (for example). Each stop symbol is determined by correcting the right symbol by shifting it by one symbol). If the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number happens to be a reach symbol, it is corrected so that it is a combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols (for example, the right symbol is corrected by shifting one symbol) and each stop symbol is used. Is determined.

When it is determined in the process of S602 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (when it is determined that the pattern is a reach variation pattern), the stop symbol of the effect symbol constituting the combination of the reach symbols is determined (S605), and the process proceeds to S616. In the processing of S605, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and a symbol corresponding to the random number extracted from SR1-1 is used by using the data table for determining the missing symbol. It is determined as the stop symbol of each of the left and right effect symbols forming the reach state, and the symbol corresponding to the random number matching the value of the counter extracted from SR1-2 is determined as the stop symbol of the middle symbol. Further, in this case as well, when a combination of jackpot symbols is accidentally made, each stop symbol is determined by correcting the combination of outlier symbols (for example, correcting the middle symbol to be shifted by one symbol).

Further, when it is not decided to make a deviation in the processing of S601 (when it is decided to make a big hit) (N of S601), the effect control CPU 101 has a big hit symbol according to the type of the big hit. The stop symbol of the effect symbol constituting the combination is determined (S603), and the process proceeds to S616.

In S603, the combination of hit symbols is determined according to the type of big hit as follows. Type of jackpot from probabilistic jackpot and normal jackpot based on which display result designation command of display result 2 designated command and display result 3 designated command is stored in the display result specific command storage area. When it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is decided, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1 and the probability variation jackpot symbol (for example, left, Using a data table (table for determining probabilistic jackpot symbol) in which the relationship with odd-numbered doublets such as "7, 7, 7" is set in the middle and right, one of the probabilistic jackpot symbols from the extracted value Select and determine the combination of. When it is determined that the normal jackpot is decided, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1 and the normal jackpot symbol (for example, left, middle, Using a data table (normal jackpot symbol determination table) with a relationship with even-numbered doublets such as "4, 4, 4" on the right, a combination of any of the normal jackpot symbols from the extracted values. To select and decide. The symbol determined in this way is used as the final stop symbol which is a variation display result before being controlled to the jackpot game state.

Next, after executing the effect setting process (S616) that performs the process for setting various effects in the variable display, the process proceeds to S617. In the effect setting process, the symbol display pattern and the like are determined based on the symbol types determined in S603 to S605. When deciding the pattern display pattern, the effect is determined by whether the fluctuation display this time is out of normal fluctuation, out of shortened fluctuation, accompanied by reach, or developed into SP reach, etc. Determine the display pattern and display mode of the design. It should be noted that these pieces of information may be determined by the variation pattern designation command stored in the command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 103.

In S617, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In S617, the symbol variation control pattern table is set according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command and various effect control (effect operation) patterns specified by the effect control pattern of the effect determined by the processing of S616. Among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in, one of the effect control patterns corresponding to the various specified effect operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 102, for example, the effect display in the period from the start of the variation of the effect symbol determined by the process of S616 until the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Data indicating the control contents of various production operations such as the variable display operation of the effect symbol in the display area of the device 9, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation by the pseudo-ream effect, and the effect display operation in the advance notice effect are Multiple types are stored as symbol fluctuation control patterns.

In addition, each symbol variation control pattern can be used to display variation of the effect symbol such as an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, voice control data, a lamp control data, and an end code. It includes control data for controlling various effect operations according to the situation, and the contents of various effect controls, the switching timing of the effect control, and the like are set in chronological order.

Next, the process table corresponding to the effect control pattern selected in S617 is selected (S618). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S619).

After executing the process of S619, the effect device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component 9 as an effect component) is used according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and a speaker 27) as an effect component is started (S620). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 9 according to the display control execution data. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of light emitters such as various LEDs. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation display time timer (S621), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation processing (S802). The symbol variation start process is executed (S622). Then, the effect symbol variation start process is completed.

[About other productions]
In the above-described embodiment, the following effects may be performed. For example, a full-screen notice effect may be executed. The full-screen notice effect is a blackout effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the decorative pattern (effect pattern) by displaying a cover image such as a darkened image DG on the entire display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of fluctuation. It is a notice production that covers the screen. The covered image is not limited to the darkened image DG or the black image, but may be an image having a predetermined color or pattern such as an image of a light emitting mode or an image of a freeze mode, and a display form of a decorative pattern (particularly). Any image may be used as long as the display content of the decorative pattern) is difficult to see or cannot be seen. In addition, the predetermined advance notice effect such as the full screen advance notice effect may be a panel type (panel display format) step-up notice, cut-in notice, story notice, mini game notice, development notice, etc., and the entire display screen. Or, it is a notice effect displayed on a part (at least a part where the decorative pattern can be hidden), and at least the decorative pattern (for example, the display form or display content of the decorative pattern) cannot be seen at all (transparency is zero). It may be a notice effect that makes it invisible, such as, or a notice effect that makes it difficult to see, such as a display screen or a decorative pattern being seen through (low transparency).

With reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, an example will be described in which the symbol advance notice effect and the reverse fluctuation are displayed in the case of the presence / absence of the full screen advance notice effect. FIG. 17 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative symbol and each notice effect, and FIG. 17 shows a case where the full screen notice effect is not executed in (A) and the full screen notice effect is executed in (B). .. FIG. 18 shows an example of effect execution in the case shown in FIG. 17 during the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 18 (A) and (B1) to (E1) are production execution examples in the case of FIG. 17 (A), and FIGS. 18 (A) and (B2) to (E2) are shown in FIG. 17 (E2). It is an production execution example in the case of B).

As shown in FIG. 17 (A), regarding the variation display of the decorative symbol, the reverse variation of all the decorative symbols is started at the start of the variation (timing T01), and the reverse variation is completed (timing T03). After the forward fluctuation of the decorative symbol is started, the fluctuation becomes high speed, and then the fluctuation of the left and right decorative symbols is decelerated, the reach is displayed (reach is established), and the reach effect is executed. Further, regarding each advance notice effect, in FIG. 17 (A), it is determined that the full screen advance notice effect is not executed, and the reverse start display of the decorative symbol and the symbol advance notice effect are started at the timing T01. .. The symbol notice production ends at timing T02, and the reverse direction fluctuation ends at timing T03. At the end of this reverse movement (timing T03), the decoration design starts to move in the forward direction. Looking at the production execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 18 (A), the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variation display, and then in order as shown in FIG. 18 (B1). The variation in the opposite direction (upward direction) opposite to the direction (downward direction) is started, and the symbol advance notice effect as shown in FIG. 18 (B1), that is, a predetermined color (for example, blue, green) around the decorative symbol. , Red color, etc.) Aura (halo) image G is displayed. Then, at the end of the reverse fluctuation shown in FIG. 17 (A) (timing T03), the reverse fluctuation of the decorative symbol is stopped as shown in FIG. 18 (C1), and the decoration is displayed as shown in FIG. 18 (D1). The forward variation of the symbol is started, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the forward direction beyond the reference position Ref shown in FIG. 18 (E1).

On the other hand, in FIG. 17B, since it is determined that the full-screen notice effect is executed, the symbol notice effect is changed from the initial value of timing T01 to timing T03. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 18 (B2), and is included in the full-screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 18 (C2). A notification image such as "chance!" Is displayed, and the symbol is displayed after the full-screen notice effect of FIG. 18 (C2) is completed, that is, when the forward variation of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 18 (D2). It has been changed so that the notice production will start. That is, the start of the symbol advance notice effect is changed not at the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 18 (B1) but after the end of the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIG. 18 (D2). As a result, it is possible to prevent the symbol advance notice effect from being hidden behind the full-screen advance notice effect. Although the reverse start display of the decorative pattern is executed without change, it is hidden behind the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIGS. 18 (B2) and (C2), so that the player can see it. can not see. Further, although the notification image shown in FIG. 18C2 is included in the full-screen notice effect, it may be a notice executed separately from the full-screen notice effect, or the notification image may not be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 18 (D2), the symbol advance notice effect is started before the decorative symbol reaches the reference position Ref, but as shown by the alternate long and short dash arrow, the decorative symbol has returned to the reference position Ref. It is also possible to execute the design notice effect from. Further, as shown in FIG. 17A, the execution period of the symbol advance notice effect is shorter than the execution period of the reverse movement, but may be the same as or longer than the execution period of the reverse movement. The same applies when the start is changed to the timing T03 as shown in FIG. 17 (B).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, an example will be described in which the reverse fluctuation is displayed in the case where the symbol advance notice effect is not executed and the full screen advance notice effect is present or absent. FIG. 19 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative symbol and each advance notice effect, and in (A), when the symbol advance notice effect and the full screen advance notice effect are not executed and the reverse variation is executed, (B). Will show the case where the symbol advance notice effect is not executed and the full screen advance notice effect and the reverse fluctuation are executed. FIG. 20 shows an example of effect execution in the case shown in FIG. 19 during the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 20 (A), (B1), (C1), (D), and (E) are production execution examples in the case of FIG. 19 (A), and FIGS. 20 (A), (B2), ( C2), (D), and (E) are production execution examples in the case of FIG. 19 (B).

Since the variable display of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 19 (A) is the same as that of FIG. 17 (A) described above, the description thereof will be omitted here. Looking at each notice effect, in FIG. 19 (A), it is decided that the full screen notice effect and the symbol notice effect are not executed, and the reverse start display of the decorative symbol is started at the timing T01, and the reverse The directional change ends at timing T03. At the end of this reverse movement (timing T03), the decoration design starts to move in the forward direction. Looking at the production execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 20 (A), the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variation display, and then in order as shown in FIG. 20 (B1). The reverse (upward) fluctuation opposite to the direction (downward) is started, and at the end of the reverse fluctuation (timing T03) shown in FIG. 19 (A), it is decorated as shown in FIG. 20 (C1). The reverse fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, the forward variation of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 20 (D1), and the decorative symbol is displayed as a forward variation beyond the reference position Ref shown in FIG. 20 (E1). Will be done.

On the other hand, in FIG. 19B, it is determined that the symbol advance notice effect is not executed, and that the full screen advance notice effect and the reverse direction change are executed. Is started at the start of fluctuation (timing T01) and ends together at timing T03. At the end of this reverse movement (timing T03), the decoration design starts to move in the forward direction. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 20 (B2), and is included in the full-screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 20 (C2). A notification image such as "chance!" Is displayed, and after the full-screen notice effect of FIG. 20 (C2) is completed, that is, the forward variation of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 20 (D). Although the reverse start display of the decorative symbol is executed, it is hidden behind the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIGS. 20 (B2) and (C2), so that the player sees the reverse direction. I can't see the fluctuation. Further, although the notification image shown in FIG. 20 (C2) is included in the full-screen notice effect, it may be a notice executed separately from the full-screen notice effect, or the notification image may not be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 20 (D), the variation display in the forward direction is visible from before the decorative symbol reaches the reference position Ref, but as shown by the alternate long and short dash arrow, the decorative symbol is at the reference position Ref. The variation display in the forward direction from the returned state may be visible.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, an example will be described in which the symbol advance notice effect is executed in the case where the reverse direction variation is not executed and the full screen advance notice effect is present or absent. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative pattern and each advance notice effect, etc. , Indicates a case where the full-screen notice effect and the design notice effect are executed. FIG. 22 shows an example of performing an effect when shown in FIG. 21 during the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 22 (A) and 22 (B1) are production execution examples in the case of FIG. 21 (A), and FIGS. 22 (A), (B2), (C2) and (D2) are shown in FIG. 21 (D2). It is an production execution example in the case of B).

Since the variable display of the decorative design shown in FIG. 21 (A) is the same as that in FIG. 17 (A) described above, the description thereof will be omitted here. Further, regarding each notice effect, in FIG. 21 (A), it is determined that the full-screen notice effect and the reverse change of the decorative symbol are not executed, and the symbol notice effect is produced at the start of the change (timing T01). Is started. The design notice production will end at the subsequent timing T02. The forward variation of the decorative symbol is also started at the start of the variation (timing T01). Looking at the production execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 22 (A), the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variation display, and then in order as shown in FIG. 22 (B1). As the change in the direction (downward direction) is started, the symbol advance notice effect as shown in FIG. 22 (B1), that is, the aura (after) of a predetermined color (for example, blue, green, red, etc.) around the decorative symbol. A notice effect in which the image G of light) is displayed is also started.

On the other hand, in FIG. 21B, since it is determined that the symbol advance notice effect and the full screen advance notice effect are executed, the symbol advance notice effect is changed from the initial value of the timing T01 to the timing T03. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 22 (B2), and is included in the full-screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 22 (C2). A notification image such as "chance!" Is displayed, and the symbol is displayed after the full-screen notice effect of FIG. 22 (C2) is completed, that is, when the forward variation of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 22 (D2). It has been changed so that the notice production will start. That is, the start of the symbol advance notice effect is changed not at the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 22 (B1) but after the end of the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIG. 22 (D2). As a result, it is possible to prevent the symbol advance notice effect from being hidden behind the full-screen advance notice effect. As shown in FIG. 21 (B), it is determined that the symbol advance notice effect and the full-screen advance notice effect are executed, and the decorative symbol is determined not to be executed in the reverse direction. During the execution period of the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in C2), the decorative pattern is swung as shown in FIG. 21 (B), but it is hidden behind the full-screen notice effect. Therefore, the player cannot see the swing of the decorative pattern. The start of the forward variation of the decorative symbol is changed after the end of the execution period of all the symbol notice effects. Further, although the notification image shown in FIG. 22 (C2) is included in the full-screen notice effect, it may be a notice executed separately from the full-screen notice effect, or the notification image may not be displayed.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A variable display means (for example, an effect display device 9) that variablely displays identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) in a predetermined direction, and
A notice effect execution means (for example, a production control CPU 101) capable of executing a predetermined advance notice effect (for example, a full-screen notice effect) and
With
The predetermined advance notice effect is executed so as to make the display mode of the identification information invisible or difficult to see at the start of the variable display (for example, FIG. 18 (B2), FIG. 20 (B2) or FIG. 22 (B2). Blackout effect that makes the decorative pattern as shown invisible),
When the predetermined advance notice effect is executed, the identification information can start variable display in the predetermined direction after the execution period of the predetermined advance notice effect has elapsed (for example, FIG. 18 (B2), FIG. As shown in FIGS. 18 (D2), (E2), 20 (D), (E) or 22 (D2) after the execution period of the blackout effect shown in 20 (B2) or 22 (B2) has elapsed. The forward fluctuation of the decorative pattern is started, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the identification information from becoming difficult to understand, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
The predetermined direction may be a normal direction (for example, the forward direction of the decorative pattern as shown in FIGS. 18 (D1), (D2), (E1), (E2)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the identification information from becoming difficult to understand.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The predetermined advance notice effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation to be in an advantageous state, and is an effect that is executed in a manner of hiding a part or the whole of the identification information (for example, the full-screen notice effect is more than the case of being off In the case of a big hit, it is easier to display, and the effect of hiding the entire decorative pattern (see FIG. 18 (B2)) may be made.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the identification information from becoming difficult to understand.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above
The variable display means can variablely display the identification information in a specific direction (for example, a reverse direction) different from the predetermined direction (for example, shown in FIGS. 18 (B1) and 20 (B1)). (For example, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable direction different from the forward direction).

According to such a configuration, the direction of the variable display becomes various, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(5) In the game machine of (4) above
The variable display means variablely displays the identification information in the specific direction at least during the execution period of the predetermined advance notice effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 17B), at least during the execution period of the full screen advance notice effect. , Displaying decorative patterns in the opposite direction, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the identification information can be variably displayed in a specific direction and then variably displayed in a predetermined direction different from the specific direction, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
The identification information notice can be executed at the start of the variation display in the predetermined direction (for example, the effect control CPU 101 can execute the symbol advance notice effect as shown in FIGS. 18 (B1) and 22 (B1). Etc.).

According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by executing the identification information notice.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
When the identification information notice and the predetermined notice effect are executed, the identification information notice is executed after the end of the predetermined notice effect (for example, the full-screen notice shown in FIGS. 18 (C2) and 22 (C2)). After the end of the effect, the symbol advance notice effect may be executed as shown in FIGS. 18 (D2) and 22 (D2)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the identification information notice and the predetermined notice effect from being executed at the same time, and the identification information notice becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the predetermined notice effect. Can be prevented.

Next, the main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) As shown in FIG. 13, the size of the numbers displayed by the second display pattern and the size of the numbers displayed by the first display pattern are different. For example, the size of the numbers displayed at the start or stop of the fluctuation displayed by the second display pattern has a smaller display range than the size of the changing numbers displayed by the first display pattern. In this way, at the start of the fluctuation or at the stop of the fluctuation, the player can pay attention to the display mode consisting of the numbers and the characters, and during the fluctuation display, only the numbers are used in a display range larger than that at the time of the stop of the fluctuation. By executing the variable display, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the transition of the effect symbol during the variable display, and it is possible to preferably display the numbers and the characters.

(2) There is a correspondence between the numbers and the characters as shown in FIG. 12, and as shown in FIG. 13, the variable display is stopped in the pattern of displaying the characters according to the numbers. By doing so, different characters will appear according to the numbers, so that the numbers and the characters can be preferably displayed.

(3) As shown in FIG. 13, as a symbol action when the fluctuation is stopped, an effect of stopping the fluctuation display is executed by a pattern in which the character is displayed larger than the number by moving the number downward. In this way, the display mode when displaying the numbers and the characters can be made interesting, and the numbers and the characters can be displayed suitably.

(4) As shown in FIG. 15, since the character moves significantly as an action at the time of reach formation, the movement of the character can be noticed, and the numbers and the character can be preferably displayed.

(5) As shown in FIG. 14, the first change effect of changing from only numbers to numbers and characters is executed as the action at the start of fluctuation, and the second is to change from numbers and characters to only numbers as the action at the start of fluctuation. Perform a change effect. The execution mode is different between the first modified effect and the second modified effect. In the variable stop symbol action executed as the first change effect, the character jumps forward from the depth direction when the screen of the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front, the numbers move downward, and the character is moved more than the numbers. In the change start symbol action, which is displayed in a large size and executed as the second change effect, the character is erased from the numbers and the character, and only the number displayed larger than before the change changes downward. In this way, numbers and characters can be preferably displayed.

(6) As shown in FIG. 15, at the end of SP reach, the symbols are aligned only with numbers, and when the final display is performed after returning to the normal background, the numbers and characters are used for the determined operation. By doing so, it is possible to display the effect symbol suitable for each scene of the effect, and it is possible to preferably display the numbers and the characters.

(7) As shown in FIG. 13, when the variable display is stopped, the display is performed so that the character appears wider than the display range of the numbers before the stop. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the discomfort when changing from the first display pattern to the second display pattern. Therefore, numbers and characters can be preferably displayed.

(8) As shown in FIGS. 13 (d) and 13 (e), as a symbol action when the fluctuation is stopped, the character is displayed so as to jump forward from the depth direction when the screen of the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front. The production is executed. In this way, a powerful display using characters can be performed.

(9) As shown in FIG. 15, as the small symbol action pattern B, an effect of violently moving the small symbol according to the effect sound during SP reach is executed. In this way, the numbers as the small symbols displayed in a reduced size can be preferably displayed.

Next, modification examples, feature points, and the like of the embodiments described above are listed below.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, a probabilistic jackpot state and a normal jackpot state are provided. Further, as the effect symbols, odd-numbered symbols were provided corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot, and even-numbered symbols were provided corresponding to the normal jackpot. Here, only the numbers corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot may be displayed in the second display pattern. For example, only the numbers corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot may be displayed as numbers and characters, and the numbers corresponding to the normal jackpot may be displayed only with the numbers without displaying the characters. In this way, it is possible to give a special feeling to the odd-numbered symbols corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot, and to give a special impression to the odd-numbered symbols having a high advantage. Of the odd-numbered symbols, only the "3" symbol and the "7" symbol may be used as probabilistic symbols, and the number of symbols displayed in the second display pattern can be changed as appropriate.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, the time is shortened (high base state) until the fluctuation display of 100 rotations after the end of the big hit. In such a time saving state, the fluctuation may be started only by the number and stopped by only the number. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state, so when a character with movement is displayed, the movement of the pattern becomes hectic and looks strange by displaying or erasing the character. This may make it difficult to see the variable display. Therefore, in the time saving state, unlike the normal state, the variable display may be executed by the first display pattern containing only numbers. In this way, the numbers can be suitably displayed in the time saving state.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, the first display pattern for displaying only numbers and the second display pattern for displaying numbers and characters have different display modes of numbers and different sizes of numbers. Explained. However, when the display mode of the numbers is different, the position of the numbers, the color of the numbers, the type of the numbers, etc. may be used instead of the size of the numbers, or any combination of two or more may be used. Good. In addition, the display mode of the numbers may be different depending on the degree of expectation of a big hit.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, a case where a small symbol is displayed in a corner of the screen of the effect display device 9 is shown. However, one of the reachable small symbols may be displayed in the upper left corner of the screen and the other in the upper right corner of the screen. In addition, as a small symbol action pattern, a case where the small symbol is moved up and down has been described. The movement of the small symbol is not limited to these, and the symbol may be shaken, rotated laterally, or bounced like a dance in time with the music. Further, an effect image (for example, a flame image) may be added around the small symbol.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, as a symbol action when the fluctuation is stopped, an effect of stopping the fluctuation display by a pattern of displaying the character larger than the number by moving the number downward is executed. However, as the symbol action when the fluctuation is stopped, the number may be moved diagonally instead of moving downward. Specifically, when the variable display is stopped, the left symbol may be moved diagonally to the right, the middle symbol may be moved directly below, and the right symbol may be moved diagonally to the left. In this way, the numerical symbols that are displayed small when the fluctuation is stopped are displayed so as to be gathered in the center, and the appearance is good. The movement of the symbol action when the fluctuation is stopped is not limited to these, and may be moved in any direction.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, the numbers and the characters have a one-to-one correspondence. However, the numbers and characters do not have to have a one-to-one correspondence. For example, the same character may correspond to a plurality of numbers, or the corresponding character may change depending on the background. Further, when the look-ahead notice is executed, the variable display of the target to be read-ahead may be changed to a special stage for a plurality of times of the variable display until the variable display is executed. In this case, special numbers and characters that are not normally displayed may be displayed. Further, it is desirable that the display patterns of the numbers and characters at this time are different from those at the normal time. It should be noted that a stage may be provided in which the variable display is executed only by numbers.

(7) In the above-described embodiment, during the variable display, the player can recognize whether or not the variable display is being performed by changing the symbol only with numbers. It is desirable that the numbers in such a fluctuation display be displayed lighter than the display mode when the fluctuation starts or stops. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect performed in the background from becoming difficult to see by setting the density to be the same as when the fluctuation starts. Then, by displaying only numbers rather than numbers and characters, the display area of the symbol can be reduced, indicating that the symbol is fluctuating and reducing the hindrance to other notices. can do.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, the symbol during reach may be the same as the symbol shown by the first display pattern during variable display, and is different from the symbol shown by the first display pattern. You may.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, the first effect of changing from numbers only to numbers and characters is executed as the action at the start of fluctuation, and the second change of changing from numbers and characters to only numbers as the action at the start of fluctuation. The case of executing the production was explained. When the change effect is executed, the character moves, but another effect image may be added. Some changes may be made to the display mode.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, as the symbol action when the fluctuation is stopped, the number to be stopped may be enlarged and displayed forward once and then reduced. Then, the character may appear from behind the enlarged number. In this way, the character is suddenly displayed in a large display mode from behind the enlarged number, so that the character can be displayed more powerfully, which may surprise the player. it can.

(11) In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of SP reach may be provided. Then, the small symbol action may be different depending on the type of SP reach.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, a case where one character is displayed for one number is shown. However, an image other than the character may be added to one number. For example, as an action when the fluctuation is stopped, an image showing that the hold display changes together with the character when the number stops (an image showing that the hold display changes to a hold display with a high expectation of big hit) may be displayed. .. In this way, it is possible to draw more attention to the action when the fluctuation is stopped. Then, it can be a look-ahead notice in which the hold display changes when the image is displayed.

(13) In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. However, not limited to this, the advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states such as a high probability state (probability variation state), a time saving state, and a high base state.

(14) In the above-described embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the effect device is provided. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speakers 27R, 27L, etc.) are mounted. You may also provide two boards, one with the second effect control board.

(15) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 uses another substrate (for example, the drawing). For the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, etc. shown in 3, or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). The effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 by executing control related to voice control and lamp control according to the operation, and further changing the received command to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. You may send it to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment, and similarly, the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board. In the case of such a configuration, the effect control microcomputer 100 may similarly make various decisions made by the effect control microcomputer 100 in the above-described embodiment, or the sound output. Control means such as a substrate 70, a lamp driver substrate 35, or a microcomputer mounted on a sound / lamp substrate may perform the operation.

(16) In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer of the variation time and the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the type of reach effect and the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, one at the time of starting the variation. Although an example of transmitting a variation pattern command is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-ream, whether or not there is a slip effect, etc., before reaching the reach (if it does not reach, the so-called second). A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. after the reach (if it does not reach, the so-called second stop). A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode (after) may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform the effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. In addition, the game control microcomputer notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the production control microcomputer selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. May be good. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has passed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command can be reduced. In the configuration in which the fluctuation pattern is notified to the effect control microcomputer by the two commands in this way, in the second command after the first command is transmitted, the judgment result of the display result by the effect processing at the time of winning, Then, the look-ahead determination information such as the variation pattern type may be transmitted, and the pre-reading notice effect may be executed based on the reception of the second command. Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed, although it is originally a one-time fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for continuous fluctuation. Further, slipping refers to an effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol is stopped in the variable display.

(17) The above-described embodiment can also be applied to a device such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko game machine 1. The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided to the computer device or the like by the detachable recording medium, and the storage device of the computer device or the like in advance. You may take the form of distribution by pre-installing on. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The embodiment of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

(18) As the present embodiment, the game machine that pays out the game medium to the player's hand according to the occurrence of the prize has been described, but the game medium is enclosed and the game medium is paid to the player according to the occurrence of the prize. An enclosed game machine that adds game points (scores) without paying out may be adopted. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls, which is an example of a game medium, in the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points, depending on the ball lending operation. The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the ball firing operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of a prize.

(19) In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case is shown in which a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of "1" to "9" are variablely displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the symbol to be variablely displayed and the symbol to be derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variablely displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to display a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

(20) In the above-described embodiment, a predetermined value exceeding 0% as the “ratio (ratio, probability)” has been described as a specific example. However, the "ratio (ratio, probability)" may be 0%. For example, when the occurrence rate of the predetermined game state 1 and the occurrence rate of the other game state 2 in the predetermined game period are compared and it is determined that "one occurrence rate is higher than the other occurrence rate". , The case where the occurrence rate of one of the gaming states is 0% is also included.

(21) In the above-described embodiment, after the variation display result when it is determined that the display result of the variation display is the probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, the probability variation state is unconditionally changed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. An example of controlled probability change state control is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 20, the probability variation determining device is controlled to the probability variation state. Type probabilistic state control may be performed.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also has a game in which identification information (design information, symbols, etc.) can be displayed in a variable manner (variable display, etc.) and controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. The machine (pachinko game machine 1 etc.) is provided with variable display means (effect display device 9, effect control microcomputer 100, etc.) capable of executing variable display of identification information, and the identification information (design information, etc.) is The first display that includes the first information (numerical information, numbers, etc.) and the second information (decorative information, characters, etc.) and displays the first information without displaying the second information in the display pattern of the identification information. A pattern (a pattern displayed by numbers and the like) and a second display pattern (a pattern displayed by numbers and characters) for displaying the first information and the second information are provided, and the variable display means identifies. After the information starts to fluctuate in a predetermined direction (downward, etc.), the fluctuation display is executed by the first display pattern (variation display is executed by numbers, etc.), and the fluctuation display is stopped by the second display pattern. (The variable display is stopped by numbers and characters, etc.), the first information when displayed in the first display pattern and the first information when displayed in the second display pattern , The display mode is different (as shown in FIG. 13, the number when displaying only numbers is displayed larger than the number when displaying numbers and characters, etc.), and further, the movement of the player is detected. Possible detection means (for example, push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A, touch sensor, infrared sensor, camera, etc.) and a specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, small buttons shown in FIGS. 47 and 54 to 60). (White) D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button (white) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc.) The specific display executing means includes display executing means (for example, button development effect processing (S90529), variable display during effect processing (S90172), etc.), and the specific display executing means is a first specific display (for example, a small button) as the specific display. (White) D901, etc.) and the degree of advantage for the player over the first specific display (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit, the degree of expectation that is a 16R probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 29), and the probability variation when there is a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot. The second specific display (for example, the first specific display is a small button (white) D) with a high expectation of becoming a big hit. When 901, the second specific display is the large button (white) D902, the large button (red) D903, stick D904, etc. When the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the second specific display is Large button (red) D903, stick D904, etc., and when the first specific display is the large button (red) D903, the second specific display can be displayed (stick D904, etc.), and the detection by the detection means is invalid. During the period (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60), after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 54 (C)). After displaying the small button (white) D901 as shown in, the small button (white) D901 is changed to the large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 55 (G), and the large button (white) D902 is further changed. (Change to large button (red) D903 as shown in FIG. 55 (I)), and after the change in the valid period of detection by the detection means (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60). An operation effect using the second specific display (for example, a large button (red) D903 or a large button (red) D903U as shown in FIGS. 55 (J) and 55 (K)) (for example, FIG. 55 (K)). A game machine in which an operation is urged as shown in FIG.

According to such a configuration, the first identification information and the second identification information can be preferably displayed. In addition, the effect of production is improved.

Further, in the above-mentioned game machine, the identification information may be related to the specific display and the operation effect. For example, even if the display modes of the first information and the second information are different between when the operation effect using the first specific display is executed and when the operation effect using the second specific display is executed. Good. According to such a configuration, the variation of the effect is increased, and it is possible to pay attention to which specific display is used to execute the motion effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine in which the first identification information and the second identification information can be suitably displayed and the effect of effect is improved, a gaming machine capable of playing a game (pachinko gaming machine 901, slot). A detection means (for example, a push button 9031B, a stick controller 9031A, a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, a camera, etc.) capable of detecting the movement of a player, and a specific display (for example, a camera, etc.) corresponding to the detection means. Small button (white) D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button (white) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large, shown in FIGS. 47 and 54 to 60. The specific display executing means for performing the button (red) D903U, the stick D904U, etc. (for example, the button development effect processing (S90529), the variable display during effect process (S90172), etc.) is provided. As the specific display, the first specific display (for example, small button (white) D901, etc.) and the advantage for the player over the first specific display (for example, jackpot expectation, 16R probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 29)). The second specific display (for example, when the first specific display is a small button (white) D901, the second specific display is large) has a high degree of expectation, the degree of expectation of a probable change big hit when there is a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot. Button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, etc. When the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the second specific display is the large button (red) D903, stick D904, etc. When 1 specific display is a large button (red) D903, the second specific display can display stick D904 or the like), and the non-valid period of detection by the detection means (for example, FIGS. 51 to 60 are shown. In (T4 to T11, etc.), after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, a small button (white) D901 is displayed as shown in FIG. 54 (C). After that, the small button (white) D901 is changed to a large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 55 (G), and the large button (white) D902 is further changed to a large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 55 (I). (Red) changed to D903), and during the valid period of detection by the detection means (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60), the second specific display after the change (for example, FIG. 55 (J)). And as shown in FIG. 55 (K), an operation effect using a large button (red) D903, a large button (red) D903U, etc.) (For example, a gaming machine in which an operation is urged as shown in FIG. 55 (K) and an effect of notifying the result as shown in FIG. 55 (L)) is executed. Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this game machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of the gaming machine, will be described. In addition, other embodiment examples may be referred to as "embodiments". FIG. 23 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to another embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko game machine 901 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (underframe) 903 that supports and fixes the game board 902. The game board 902 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails.

A normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided in the lower portion of the game area on the game board 902. The ordinary winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 906B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normally open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9081 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with a tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a starting area (second starting area) and a second starting winning opening. When the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "starting winning openings".

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 24. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. 24.

In addition, game balls that have passed (entered) the winning openings such as the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening) and the large winning opening (described later) are provided corresponding to the respective winning openings. Detection by switches (first start port switch 9022A, second start port switch 9022B, count switch 9023 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Of the "winnings", winning the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening) is called "starting winning", and in particular, winning the first starting winning opening is called the first starting winning. , The prize in the second start prize opening is referred to as the second start prize.

Based on the occurrence of the first start winning prize (detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 9022A), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure reserved memory number (described later). ) Is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the decorative symbol executed in the first special symbol game (described later) or the image display device 905 (described later) executed in the first special symbol display device 904A. The first start condition (also referred to as the first execution condition) for executing the variable display game such as the variable display of is satisfied.

Based on the occurrence of the second start winning prize (detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 9022B), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure reserved memory number (described later) ) Is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the decorative symbol executed in the second special symbol game (described later) or the image display device 905 (described later) executed in the second special symbol display device 904B. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as the variable display of is satisfied. The number of prize balls paid out based on the first starting prize and the number of prize balls paid out based on the second starting prize may be the same number or different numbers. Good.

The first special figure reservation number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not immediately executed when the first start winning is generated and the execution is temporarily suspended. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) and the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start prize, the first start prize is generated. When the first start condition that allows the start of the above-mentioned variable display game is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first or second start condition that is satisfied earlier is being executed or pachinko. When the gaming machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a waiting state for execution). That is, the first special figure hold storage number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning prize in the state of waiting for execution. The number of reserved first special figures is reduced by one each time one of the first start conditions is satisfied.

It should be noted that although the first start condition by a certain first start prize is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the first start prize is not satisfied by the first start condition that allows the start of the variable display game by the first start prize. Information about the above is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start prize is satisfied. In other words, the reserved first special figure reservation information is digested one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested first special figure reservation information is executed.

The second special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not immediately executed when the second start winning is generated and the execution is temporarily suspended. Due to the occurrence of the second start prize, even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) and the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, the second start prize is generated. When the second start condition that allows the start of the above-mentioned variable display game is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first or second start condition that is satisfied earlier is being executed or pachinko. When the gaming machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a waiting state for execution). That is, the second special figure hold storage number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning prize in the state of waiting for execution. The number of reserved second special figures is reduced by one each time one of the second start conditions is satisfied.

It should be noted that although the second start condition by a certain second start prize is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the second start prize is not satisfied by the second start condition that allows the start of the variable display game by the second start prize. The information regarding the above is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until the second start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the second start prize is satisfied. In other words, the reserved second special figure reservation information is digested one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested second special figure reservation information is executed.

The number of reserved memories obtained by adding the number of reserved memories of the first special figure and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is referred to as "total reserved memory number". When the first special figure holding memory number, the second special figure holding storage number, and the total holding storage number are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "special figure holding storage number" or "holding storage number". That is, one or two of the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the total reserved storage number when simply referred to as "special figure reserved storage number" or "holding storage number". Or it may refer to three. Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "start condition" or "execution condition". Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "start condition". Further, when the first special figure reservation information and the second special figure reservation information are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "special figure reservation information".

A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided in the lower portion of the game area on the game board 902. The special variable winning ball device 907 forms a large winning opening that changes between a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning ball device 907 includes, for example, a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 24, and the state of the large winning opening by opening and closing the large winning opening door. Change (open state, closed state).

As an example, the special variable winning ball device 907 closes the big winning door when the solenoid 9082 is off to close the big winning door, and opens the big winning door when the solenoid 9082 is on. The large winning opening is opened. The game ball that has passed (entered) the large winning opening that has been opened is detected by, for example, the count switch 9023 shown in FIG. 24. That is, by opening the large winning opening, a prize is generated in the large winning opening.

A predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the occurrence of a prize in the large prize opening (detection of game balls by the count switch 9023). The number of prize balls paid out based on the occurrence of a prize in the large prize opening (for example, 12) is the number of prize balls paid out based on the occurrence of the first start prize (for example, 3), and the second start prize. More than the number of prize balls paid out based on the occurrence of (for example, 3). That is, the state of the big winning opening (open state, closed state) has a great influence on whether or not it is advantageous for the player.

A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided on the right side portion of the game area on the game board 902. The first special symbol display device 904A is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED (light emitting diode) of a dot matrix or the like. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 904B. The first special symbol display device 904A variably displays (variably displays) a special symbol (also referred to as a "special symbol") which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) capable of identifying each of them. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 904B. The special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as "first special symbol" or "special diagram 1", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B. (Special figure) is also referred to as "second special figure" or "special figure 2". Further, a game (or the variable display of the identification information itself) executed with the variable display of the identification information is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, the variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 904A (variable display game for variablely displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as the first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 904B. (Variable display game in which the second special figure is variably displayed) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, it is also simply referred to as a "special figure game".

The first special symbol display device 904A (the same applies to the second special symbol display device 904B) is a special symbol game of a plurality of types composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Variable display of special symbols. Each special symbol has a symbol number corresponding to each.

A first hold display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided on the right side portion of the game area (upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B) on the game board 902. .. The first hold indicator 9025A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold storage number (the number of hold of the first special figure game) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). The first hold display to be displayed as possible is performed. The second hold indicator 9025B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the number of second special figure hold storages (the number of holds of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second hold display is performed to display as possible.

When the first hold display and the second hold display are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "hold display". Further, the expression "hold display" may refer to an operation (LED lighting control by the first hold display 9025A and the second hold display 9025B), or may refer to the display itself (display by LED). .. For example, the hold display when it is said that the hold display is newly added indicates the newly added display itself. The same applies to the "hold display" in the start winning memory display area 905H (described later) and the "active display" (described later) in the active display area AHA'(described later).

On the left side of the game area on the game board 902, a passing gate 9041, a normal symbol display 9020, and a normal symbol hold display 9025C are provided. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 9041 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. 24. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021, if the number of reserved memory (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), the normal symbol display 9020 The normal map start condition for executing the normal map game (described later) executed in is satisfied.

The ordinary symbol display 9020 is composed of a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix LED, or the like, like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. The ordinary symbol display 9020 variably displays (variably displays) an ordinary symbol (also referred to as a "normal diagram" or "ordinary symbol") which is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. A variable display game in which a normal symbol is variably displayed is also referred to as a normal figure game (or "normal figure game"). Information about the Fuzu game in which the Fuzu start condition is satisfied but the Fuzu start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as hold data (Public map hold information).

The normal figure hold display 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages based on the hold data (normal figure hold information), for example, by the number of LEDs to be turned on. The normal figure hold memory number is the number of normal figure games whose execution is temporarily suspended without being immediately executed when the game ball passing through the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021. That is, the number of reserved fuzu games is the number of games of the fuzu game waiting to be executed. The number of reserved normal maps is reduced by 1 each time one condition for starting a normal map is satisfied.

An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effects images.

Decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 905. In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, are variably displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate in conjunction with (corresponding to) the special symbol game, and the final decorative symbol (also referred to as the final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. .. The decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 905L is also referred to as a left symbol, the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 905C is also referred to as a medium symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 905R is also referred to as a right symbol. Variable display of decorative patterns is also included in the variable display game.

In addition, a start winning memory display area 905H is arranged in the display area of the image display device 905. In the start winning prize storage display area 905H, the hold display corresponding to the hold information is performed. In the start winning prize memory display area 905H, for example, the hold display may be performed left-justified. That is, when the number of holdings of the special figure game increases due to the establishment of the new starting condition, the new holding is performed in order from the left end of the starting winning memory display area 905H (the closest side to the active display area AHA'). You may add a display. When the number of hold of the special figure game decreases due to the establishment of the new start condition, the hold display (the oldest hold display) displayed at the left end of the start prize memory display area 905H is deleted. , When there is another hold display, move (shift) the other hold display (each hold display when there are multiple other hold displays) to the left.

Further, in the display area of the image display device 905, an active display area (also referred to as a display area this time, an active hold display area, a display area at the time of digestion, etc.) AHA'is arranged. In the active display area, active display (also referred to as digestion display, this time display, etc.) is performed based on the fact that the hold display is deleted from the start winning memory display area 905H when the start condition is satisfied. That is, when the start condition is satisfied, the hold display displayed at the left end of the start winning memory display area 905H is moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA', and the active display is displayed. Hereinafter, the active display displayed based on the deletion of a certain hold display M may also be referred to as an active display corresponding to the hold display M.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, the active display area AHA'is arranged on the left side of the start winning memory display area 905H, but the active display area AHA'is any of the display areas of the image display device 905. It suffices if it is arranged at that position.

An upper plate and a lower plate are provided at predetermined positions of the game machine frame 903 below the game area. A stick controller 9031A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is. The member forming the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 9031B capable of a player performing a predetermined instruction operation by pressing or the like at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 9031A) on the upper surface of the upper plate body. It is provided.

A voice output member is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area of the game machine frame 903. In the example shown in FIG. 23, the speaker 908UL and the speaker 908UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 903, and the speaker 908LL and the speaker 908LR are placed at the lower left and right oblique parts of the upper plate (the upper left and right oblique parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, when the speakers 908UL, 908UR, 908LL, and 908LR are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as speakers 908.

A movable accessory (movable body) that operates as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the game area of the game machine frame 903. In the example shown in FIG. 23, the upper position of the image display device 905 is from the first position (initial position shown in FIG. 23) to the second position (lower end position. For example, the position in front of the display area of the image display device 905). A movable accessory 9017 that can move up to is provided.

Further, a light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the game area of the game machine frame 903. In the example shown in FIG. 23, the light emitting member 909CC is installed on the movable accessory 9017, the light emitting member 909CL and the light emitting member 909CR are installed at the left and right positions of the image display device 905, and the light emitting member is installed at the upper position of the gaming machine frame 903. Light emitting members 909SL and light emitting members 909SR are installed at the left and right positions of the 909U and the game machine frame 903. Hereinafter, when the light emitting members 909CC, 909CL, 909CR, 909U, 909SL, and 909SR are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as lamps 909.

The image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, and the movable accessory 9017 described above are production devices that execute the effect, but the game machine 901 has other effects such as a device having a vibrating portion and a device having a blower portion. It may be equipped with a device.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described.

In the pachinko game machine 901, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 9020 is started based on the fact that the normal map start condition is satisfied after the normal map start condition is satisfied. In the normal symbol game, after the variable display of the normal symbol is started (after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started), when the predetermined time that becomes the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol is obtained. Is stopped and displayed (derivative display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal symbol (per ordinary symbol)". ". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol loss (normal)". Design loss) ”. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per normal figure", the expansion / opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 906B is in the tilt position. However, normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position after a predetermined time has elapsed.

In the pachinko game machine 901, the first special figure game is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied, and the second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition is satisfied. Based on this, the second special figure game is started. In the special symbol game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the fluctuation of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the variable display result of the special symbol is confirmed special. The symbol (special figure display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, " It becomes "missing". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be a "small hit" as the predetermined display result.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the present embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers "3", "5", and "7" is used as a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is used as a lost symbol. Note that different special symbols in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game may be used as jackpot symbols.

After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the pachinko game machine 901 is controlled to the big hit game state which is a specific game state. The pachinko gaming machine 901 controls the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 907 to be in the open state in the big hit game state. The jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot is controlled to be open is an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player. Further, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", the pachinko game machine 901 is controlled to the small hit game state which is a special game state different from the big hit game state.

Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 901 determines a round (also referred to as “round game”) that is advantageous to the player in the jackpot game state after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”. (Predetermined number of rounds), execute. The round is an open cycle of the big winning opening. In each round (each round), the pachinko gaming machine 901 opens and closes the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 907 to change the state (open state, closed state) of the large winning opening. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 opens the big prize opening door at the start of the round to change the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state, keeps the big winning opening open, and then closes the big winning door. The big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, and one round is completed. In the round, the big prize opening is whether a predetermined upper limit opening time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses after opening the big prize opening door, or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of prizes are generated for the big winning opening. It is maintained in the open state until any of the conditions is satisfied.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 repeatedly executes rounds in the jackpot game state until the number of rounds executed reaches a predetermined upper limit. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 executes the round even before the number of times the round is executed reaches the predetermined upper limit, if the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball does not win the big winning opening). May be terminated. In the present embodiment, the predetermined upper limit is two types (8 times corresponding to 8R and 16 times corresponding to 16R; see FIG. 29), but may be one type or three or more types. You may.

In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R arranged in the display area of the image display device 905, variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the start of the special symbol game. In addition, the reach state may be reached during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol. The reach state is a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (also referred to as a "reach variable symbol"). Is a display state in which the fluctuation is continuous, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols are fluctuating in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. The production in the reach state is called the reach production.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as "reach patterns") having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the effect pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect (also referred to as “big hit expectation” or “big hit reliability”) may be different.

The expectation of a big hit by a certain effect is, for example, (probability that the effect is executed at the time of a big hit) × (probability of being a big hit) / {(probability that the effect is executed at the time of a big hit) × (probability of being a big hit). It is calculated by + (probability that the effect is executed other than at the time of big hit) x (probability that it does not become big hit)}. If a certain effect always results in a "big hit", the expected degree of big hit for that effect is "1". The same applies to the degree of expectation of super reach due to a certain production.

The reach production is a production that gives notice and suggests to the player that the big hit expectation is high, but the pachinko gaming machine 901 gives a notice to the player that the big hit expectation is high in addition to the reach production. Suggested effects (for example, hold effects, pseudo-continuous effects, etc.) can be executed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 can execute an effect (for example, a hold effect, a slip effect, etc.) that gives notice or suggests to the player that any reach effect or a certain reach effect will be executed. Hereinafter, the effect of notifying or suggesting to the player that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the expectation of a big hit is high may be collectively referred to as a notice effect.

It should be noted that the notification (notice, suggestion) by the advance notice effect may be performed before the player recognizes whether or not the notification content is realized. For example, the advance notice effect for notifying the possibility of reaching the reach state may be performed before the reach state (or non-reach state) is reached. Further, the advance notice effect for notifying the possibility that the variable display result may be a "big hit" may be performed before the final decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

The advance notice effect may include a look-ahead advance notice effect (also referred to as "preliminary determination advance notice effect"). In the pre-reading notice effect, before starting the variable display that is the target of the notice, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" based on the hold information of the special figure game. (Look ahead), it is a notice effect to be executed based on the judgment result. In the following description, the hold information targeted for the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as the target hold information, the hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to. Also called variable display of the target. The active display corresponding to the hold display of the target (active display displayed during the variable display of the target) is also referred to as the active display of the target.

The display mode of the active display may be determined at the time of winning, at the time of the hold display (before it becomes the active display), or when it becomes the active display (at the start of the fluctuation). May be decided. Further, the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the active corresponding to the hold display (active display displayed by deleting the hold display) may be the same (or substantially the same). They may be related to each other. The same (or substantially the same) display mode means that, for example, an active display having the same or substantially the same display mode as the display mode of the hold display before erasure is displayed.

When the display modes are related to each other, for example, there are three types of display modes having different jackpot expectations (expectation of display mode a> expectation of display mode b> expectation of display mode c) as display modes of hold display. However, as the display mode of the active display, three types of display modes having different jackpot expectations (expectation of display mode s> expectation of display mode t> expectation of display mode u. However, the display mode s is display mode a, Different from any of b and c, the display mode t is different from any of the display modes a, b and c, and the display mode u is different from any of the display modes a, b and c). When the hold display is deleted, the active display of the display mode s is displayed, when the hold display of the display mode b is deleted, the active display of the display mode t is displayed, and when the hold display of the display mode c is deleted, the active display is displayed. The active display of aspect u is displayed. In addition, when the active display effect at the time of addition described later is executed, when the hold display of the display mode a is deleted, the active display of the display mode t or the display mode u is displayed, and the hold display of the display mode b is deleted. When this is done, the active display of the display mode u is displayed.

In the present embodiment, as the pre-reading notice effect, the hold effect according to the display mode of the hold display in the start winning prize memory display area 905H can be executed. For the hold effect, for example, the hold display to be added to the start winning memory display area 905H is displayed in a notice mode (blue or red in the present embodiment) different from the normal mode (white in the present embodiment) (hold at the time of addition). The effect (effect) and the effect (hold change effect) of changing the already displayed hold display to the notice mode (including the change from one notice mode to another notice mode) are included.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the pre-reading notice effect, it is an effect to be executed when the hold display is changed to the notice mode, and a character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 to directly display the hold display. An effect that indirectly acts (holding action effect. It may be referred to as "holding action success effect" to distinguish it from "holding action failure effect" described later) is feasible. Further, it may be possible to execute an effect (holding action failure effect) that is executed when the hold display is not changed to the advance notice mode, which is an effect in which at least a part of the effect mode is common to the hold action success effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the advance notice effect (or the look-ahead advance notice effect), the active display effect according to the display mode of the active display in the active display area AHA'may be feasible. The active display effect includes, for example, an effect of displaying the active display to be added to the active display area AHA'in the active display area AHA'when the hold display at the time of erasure is in the normal mode (active display effect at the time of addition), or in the normal mode. An effect (active display change effect) for changing the displayed active display to a notice mode (including a change from one notice mode to another notice mode) is included. When the hold change effect and the active display change effect are not particularly distinguished, they may be referred to as "hold change effect".

When the active display effect is feasible, the hold action success effect is executed when the active display is changed to the advance notice mode, and a character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 to be active. It may be an effect that acts directly or indirectly. Similarly, the hold action failure effect may be an effect executed when the active display is not changed to the advance notice mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a concealment effect that conceals the hold display in the start winning prize memory display area 905H. The concealment effect is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the hold display. For example, in the concealment effect, it is difficult to visually recognize the hold display so that even the number of hold displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 905H cannot be recognized at all (for example, an image for concealment is displayed on the front surface (upper layer). It becomes like a silhouette as a whole and is vague and difficult to see, an image for concealment is displayed on the front and it is difficult to see because it is partially obstructed, and the hold display itself becomes difficult to see (smaller, semi-transparent) It may be an effect that makes it difficult or impossible (for example, an image for concealment is displayed on the front surface and is completely invisible, or is completely invisible due to transparency or non-display). Further, although the number of hold displays displayed in the start winning prize memory display area 905H is somehow recognizable (for example, recognizable by the silhouette), it may be an effect that makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize each display mode. .. Further, although the display mode is recognizable, it may be an effect that makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the number. For example, it may notify the presence or absence of a hold display (for example, a red hold display) in a certain display mode. Further, in the case of the hold display in which the notice mode is expressed not in the whole but in a part (for example, the upper part), it is difficult for the concealment effect to visually recognize the upper part of each hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 905H. Alternatively, it may be an effect that makes it impossible.

Further, the concealment effect may conceal the active display in the active display area AHA'in place of or in addition to the hold display in the start winning memory display area 905H.

In the present embodiment, as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, a special symbol indicating the number "3" among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers "3", "5", and "7") that are the jackpot symbols is shown. When the symbol or the special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed, it becomes "8R probability variation jackpot" which is one aspect of "big hit". Further, when the special symbol indicating the number "7" is stopped and displayed, it becomes "16R probability variation big hit" which is one aspect of "big hit". After the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot are completed, the probability variation control (probability fluctuation control) is performed together with the time reduction control (time reduction control).

By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than when the probability variation control is not performed. The probability variation control is performed under either a condition of executing a special figure game with a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as a probability variation number) after the end of the jackpot game state, or when the variable display result becomes a "big hit". Ends when is first established. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become a "big hit" when the probability variation control is performed, the probability variation control is performed when the special figure game of a predetermined number of STs (probability variation number) is digested. finish. The predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times.

Further, by performing the time saving control, the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the case where the time saving control is not performed. The time saving control is when any of the conditions of the execution of the special figure game of a predetermined number of time saving times and the variable display result being "big hit" are satisfied first after the end of the big hit game state. It ends in. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become a "big hit" when the time saving control is being performed, the time saving control ends when the special figure game of a predetermined number of time saving times is exhausted. The predetermined number of time reductions is, for example, 70 times.

When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than when the time reduction control is not performed, or is normal in each normal symbol game. In the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on the control that improves the probability that the variable display result of the symbol becomes "per ordinary figure" compared to the time when the time saving control is not performed, and the variable display result becomes "per ordinary figure". The game ball wins the second start, such as control to make the tilt control time for tilt control of the movable wing piece longer than when time reduction control is not performed, and control to increase the number of tilts compared to when time reduction control is not performed. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by making it easier to pass (enter) the mouth and increasing the possibility that the second starting condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening due to the time saving control, which is advantageous for the player, is also called a high opening control. As the high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the expanded open state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B is easily satisfied, and the second special symbol game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result is next. Is shortened until it becomes a "big hit". The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

The gaming state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state. In addition, the gaming state in which the probability change control is performed is also referred to as a high probability state or a probability change state. The time saving state (high base state) and the high probability state (probability change state) are examples of advantageous states that are advantageous for the player.

A gaming state in which time reduction control and high opening control are performed together with probability change control, that is, a gaming state that is both a high probability state (probability change state) and a high base state (time reduction state) is a high accuracy high base state or a time reduction probability change state. Also called. A gaming state in which only probability variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed, that is, a gaming state in which a high probability state (probability variation state) but not a high base state (time reduction state) is performed is a high accuracy low base state. Alternatively, it is also called a time-saving uncertain change state. In addition, only the high accuracy and high base state (probability change state with time reduction) may be referred to as "probability change state". A gaming state in which time reduction control or high opening control is performed without probability change control, that is, a gaming state that is not a high probability state (probability change state) but a high base state (time reduction state) is also called a low probability high base state. Will be done. A gaming state in which probabilistic control is not performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed, that is, a gaming state that is neither a high probability state (probability change state) nor a high base state (time reduction state) is also called a low probability low base state. Will be done. The low-accuracy low-base state is a normal state in which no probability variation control, time-saving control, or high-opening control is performed. Sometimes referred to as "normal state". The initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (a state after the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed) is a normal state.

In the present embodiment, even if the variable display result does not become a "big hit" while the probability variation control is being performed, when the special figure game of a predetermined number of STs (probability variation number) is digested. , The probability variation control ends, but the probability variation control may not end until the variable display result becomes a "big hit" without providing the ST number (probability variation number). That is, a probability variation jackpot may be provided to continue the probability variation control until the next jackpot. When a probability variation jackpot that continues the probability variation control until the next jackpot is provided, a normal jackpot that is not performed after the probability variation control may be further provided.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 24. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 of the pachinko game machine 901.

The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a function for setting a random number used in a special figure game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 9011 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 9020. It also has a control function.

On the main board 9011, for example, from a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110 that takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100, and a game control microcomputer 90100. A solenoid circuit 90111 or the like that transmits a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 and 9082 is mounted.

The effect control board 9012 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives an image display device 905, a speaker 908, and a lamp. Various circuits for controlling the effect operation by the 909 and the movable accessory 9017 are mounted.

The audio control board 9013 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is for outputting audio from the speaker 908 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and lights / turns off drive of the lamp 909 or the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit to perform. The accessory control board 9016 is a control board for controlling the operation of the accessory provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and drives the movable accessory 9017 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. A circuit that outputs a drive signal is mounted on an actuator (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 24, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 is connected to the main board 9011. The gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. It should be. In addition to the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023, the game machine 901 also has other switches connected to the main board 9011 (for example, a glass door (not shown)). ) May be provided, a switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 902 itself, a switch for detecting an illegal vibration, a switch for detecting an illegal electromagnetic wave). Further, on the main board 9011, the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the normal symbol display 9020, the first hold display 9025A, the second hold display 9025B, and the normal figure hold display 9025C Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

FIG. 25A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 25A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the effect control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the effect control command may be one or a plurality of three or more. Good.

The information constituting each effect control command may be stored in the command table in the ROM 90101, for example. When a certain effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the storage address of the effect control command in the above command table is specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer as a setting for transmitting the effect control command. It may be stored in the created buffer area. After that, the command control process (step S9017) of the game control timer interrupt process (FIG. 33) is executed, so that the effect control command set as described above is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. Is transmitted.

A part of FIG. 25 (A) will be described. For example, the command 8001H is a first variable start command that specifies the start of the first special figure game. The command 8002H is a second variable start command that specifies the start of the second special figure game. The command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command for designating a variable pattern such as a decorative symbol that is variably displayed in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command for notifying a variable display result. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (B), the determination result and the jackpot type of whether the variable display result is "miss", "16R probability variation jackpot", or "8R probability variation jackpot". Different EXT data are set according to the determination result of.

The command B100H is a first start opening winning notification command for notifying that the first starting condition has been satisfied (sometimes referred to as a first starting opening winning designation command or a first starting opening winning command). The command B200H is a second start opening winning notification command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B has been satisfied (second starting opening winning designation command). , It may be called a command at the time of winning the second starting port).

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number. For example, when the first start winning is generated (when the number of reserved storages in the first special figure increases), the first holding storage number notification command is transmitted together with the first starting opening winning notification command. Further, when the second start winning is generated (when the second special figure reserved storage number is increased), the second starting opening winning notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are transmitted.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. The command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating a determination result of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a winning determination result, and a determination result of the big hit type. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category designation command (also referred to as "variation category command") indicating a determination result of a variation category (also referred to as "variation pattern type") as a winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative patterns are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is the group name of each group including the variation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

In the present embodiment, in the winning random number value determination process (FIG. 37), when the starting winning is generated, the variable category is excluded except in some cases (for example, when the first starting winning is made in a high base state or the like). The fluctuation category is determined based on the random value MR3'for determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variable category command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control board 9012. The effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 super-reachs the variable display based on the start prize based on the value set in the variable category command transmitted from the main board 9011 when the start prize occurs. It is possible to recognize whether or not it becomes.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 that stores game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes the game control program and performs the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 90103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 90104 to be performed, and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105.

FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value that is counted (updated) on the side of the main board 9011. As shown in FIG. 26, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 9011, the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 ′ for determining the variable category. , Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4'for determining the display result of the general map and the random number value MR5'for determining the fluctuation pattern are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 90104 may be any one that counts numerical data indicating a part or all of the random number values MR1'to MR5'. The CPU 90103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 90104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154 shown in FIG. 30, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number value MR1'. Numerical data indicating a part of ~ MR5'may be counted.

FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a variation category and a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 27, the fluctuation category “PA1'” is a shortened / non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern "PA1'-1" belongs to the fluctuation category "PA1'". The variable category "PA2'" is a non-reach (missing) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PA2'-1" and "PA2'-2" belong to the variation category "PA2'". The variable category "PA3'" is a normal reach (missing) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PA3'-1" and "PA3'-2" belong to the variation category "PA3'". The fluctuation category "PA4'" is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation category. Fluctuation patterns "PA4'-1" to "PA4'-3" belong to the fluctuation category "PA4'". The fluctuation category "PA5'" is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation category. Fluctuation patterns "PA5'-1" to "PA5'-3" belong to the fluctuation category "PA5'". The variable category "PB1'" is a shortened / reach (big hit) variable category. The fluctuation pattern "PB1'-1" belongs to the fluctuation category "PB1'". The variable category "PB3'" is a normal reach (big hit) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PB3'-1" and "PB3'-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PB3'". The variable category "PB4'" is a super reach α (big hit) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PB4'-1" to "PB4'-3" belong to the fluctuation category "PB4'". The variable category "PB5'" is a super reach β (big hit) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PB5'-1" to "PB5'-3" belong to the fluctuation category "PB5'".

A part of FIG. 27 will be described. For example, the fluctuation pattern "PA3'-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PA3'" is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern "PA3'-2" is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern "PA4'-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PA4'" is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern "PA4'-2" is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern "PA4'-3" is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. The fluctuation pattern "PB3'-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB3'" is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern "PB3'-2" is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern "PB1'-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB1'-1" is a shortened / reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the fluctuation pattern "PB3'-1". The fluctuation pattern "PB4'-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB4'" is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern "PB4'-2" is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern "PB4'-3" is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

FIG. 28 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 90101. In the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 28, the special figure display result is displayed as a random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result before the variable display result (special figure display result) of the special figure game is derived and displayed. It is a table referenced to make a decision based on. In the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 28, the determination values (for determining the special figure display result) assigned to each special figure display result (“big hit”, “loss”) according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The number of random values (values to be compared with MR1') is different. According to the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 28, when the game state is in the high probability state, more determination values are assigned to the “big hit” than in the low probability state. That is, the probability of becoming a "big hit" is higher in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

FIG. 29 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 90131 stored in the ROM 90101. The jackpot type determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 29 is for determining the jackpot type to be selected from a plurality of types when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the jackpot game state is controlled. It is a table referred to for determination based on a random number value MR2'. In the jackpot type determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 29, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (that is, whether the first special figure game is executed or the second special figure game is executed). (Depending on whether to execute), the number of judgment values (values to be compared with the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type) assigned to each jackpot type ("16R probability variation jackpot", "8R probability variation jackpot") It's different. According to the jackpot type determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 29, when the variable special figure is the second special figure (when the second special figure game is executed), it is higher than when the variable special figure is the first special figure. (Compared to when the first special figure game is executed), many judgment values are assigned to "16R probability variation jackpot". That is, in the second special figure game, the probability of becoming a "16R probability variation big hit" is higher when the "big hit" is made than in the first special figure game.

Further, the ROM 90101 has a variation category determination table referred to for determining a variation category to any one of a plurality of types, and a variation pattern referred to for determining a variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types. The decision table is stored.

The RAM 90102 holds various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The RAM 90102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the data to be held is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board.

FIG. 30 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control data holding area provided in the RAM 90102. The RAM 90102 is provided with a game control data holding area 90150 as shown in FIG. 30, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The game control data holding area 90150 shown in FIG. 30 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 90151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 90151B, a holding specific information storage unit 90151C, a normal figure holding storage unit 90151D, and a game. It includes a control flag setting unit 90152, a game control timer setting unit 90153, a game control counter setting unit 90154, and a game control buffer setting unit 90155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A stores the hold data (first hold information) of the first special figure game. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A associates the holding number with the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) to the first starting winning opening, and random numbers are generated by the CPU 90103 based on the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating random number values extracted from the circuit 90104 or the like (for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1'to MR3') is set as pending data, and the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). Remember up to.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B stores the hold data (second hold information) of the second special figure game. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game balls) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and random numbers are generated by the CPU 90103 based on the passage (entry) of the game balls. Numerical data indicating random number values extracted from the circuit 90104 or the like (for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1'to MR3') is set as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). Remember.

The hold specific information storage unit 90151C has a winning order of the entire hold data including the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 90151A and the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 90151B ( Hold data based on the occurrence of the first start prize (first hold information) or hold data based on the occurrence of the second start prize (second hold information) in association with the hold number which is the game ball detection order) Stores information indicating whether or not. In the hold specific information storage unit 90151C shown in FIG. 36, "first" indicates that it is the first hold information, and "second" indicates that it is the second hold information.

The Fuzu hold storage unit 90151D stores the hold information of the Fuzu game. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 90151D associates the game ball with the hold number in the order in which it has passed through the passage gate 9041, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4'for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 90152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control flag setting unit 90152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 90153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control timer setting unit 90153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 90154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control counter setting unit 90154 receives a first reserved storage number count value and a second special figure reserved storage number, which are stored values of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first special figure reserved storage number. The second hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the second hold storage counter for counting, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter for counting the total hold storage number, etc. Be remembered.

The game control buffer setting unit 90155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 90155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The I / O 90105 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 24 has an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100. It is configured to include an output port for transmission.

As shown in FIG. 24, the effect control board 9012 provides an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the effect control CPU 90120. RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 90120. The circuit 90124, the I / O 90125, and the RTC (real-time clock) circuit 90126 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 90120, ROM 90121, and RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

The effect control board 9012 is used for wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image to the image display device 905 and for transmitting an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command to the voice control board 9013. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (illuminated signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 9014, and the like are connected. Further, on the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 9031A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 9035A and a game for the push button 9031B A wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that a person's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 9035B is also connected.

In the effect control board 9012, for example, a random number circuit 90124 or the like counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation. The random number used to control such an effect operation is also called an effect random number.

The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 24 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 90121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the effect control CPU 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

Further, the ROM 90121 is provided with a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 90120 to control the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, an image display device 905, a speaker 908, a lamp 909, a movable accessory 9017, etc.). The constituent data is stored. Each effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. That is, various effect operations are realized by setting the effect control pattern. For example, the variable display operation of the decorative symbol corresponding to each variation pattern is realized by setting the effect control pattern corresponding to each variation pattern. Hold production, active display production, fanfare production, production during round game (opening production, closing production), ending production, etc. are also realized by setting production control patterns corresponding to each production.

FIG. 31 (A) shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is a control for controlling various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, movable accessory control data, and end code. It suffices that it is composed of data and the contents of various effect controls, the switching timing of the effect control, and the like are set in chronological order. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data that specifies the content of motion control in the movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control microcomputer. Therefore, a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In addition, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command was received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process was executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer. Data indicating the switching timing of the effect control and the like may be set corresponding to a predetermined control content and processing content.

The display control data includes data indicating a display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 905, such as data indicating a variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 905. The voice control data includes data indicating a voice output mode from the speaker 908, such as data indicating an output mode of an effect sound or the like linked to a variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the voice control data is data that specifies the voice output operation from the speaker 908. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating a light emitting operation mode of the lamp 909. That is, the lamp control data is data that specifies the light emitting operation of the lamp 909. The operation detection control data includes data indicating a period for effectively detecting an operation on an operation unit such as a push button 9031B, a control content of an effect operation when the operation is effectively detected, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that specifies an effect operation according to an operation on the operation unit. The movable accessory control data includes, for example, data indicating an operation mode of the movable accessory 9017. That is, the movable accessory control data is data that specifies the operation of the movable accessory 9017. It should be noted that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, and the effect control pattern is configured to include a part of the control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

FIG. 31B is a diagram for explaining various effect operations executed according to the contents of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 90120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative symbol is displayed in the manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character is displayed. Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 905. In addition, control is performed to output voice from the speaker 908 in the mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to emit light of the lamp 909 in the mode specified by the lamp control data. During the valid period (sometimes referred to simply as the valid period), control is performed to accept operations on the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B and determine the content of the effect. Dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set for the data corresponding to the effect device that is not the control target even if it corresponds to the effect control process timer determination value.

The effect operation shown in FIG. 31 (B) corresponds to the entire period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and is in the variable display of the decorative symbol. An effect control pattern for executing the effect operation may be provided corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period for executing the advance notice effect). Alternatively, in order to execute the effect operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, a period during which the round is being executed in the jackpot game state, a period during which the ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot game state, etc.). The effect control pattern may be provided.

When setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 90121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, or the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be temporarily stored. The storage address in the ROM 90121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 90121 may be specified. After that, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, and if it matches, the effect operation corresponding to the corresponding various control data is performed. To control. As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 has the effect device (for example, the image display device 905, the speaker 908, and the lamp) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to the process data # n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. 909, movable accessory 9017, etc.) are controlled. In each process data # 1 to process data # n, display control data # 1 to display control data # n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to # n. Data # n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data # n, operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data # n, movable accessory control data # 1 to movable accessory control data # n are productions of each. The effect control execution data # 1 to the effect control execution data # n that indicate the control content of the effect operation in the device and specify the execution of the effect control are configured.

A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 90120 to the display control unit 90123, the voice control board 9013, the lamp control board 9014, the accessory control board 9016, and the like. For example, in the display control unit 90123 that receives a command from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads the image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily stores the image data in the VRAM. Let me. Further, in the voice control board 9013 that receives a command from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores the voice data in the voice RAM or the like. ..

FIG. 32A is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area provided in the RAM 90122. The RAM 90122 is provided with an effect control data holding area 90190 as shown in FIG. 32 (A), for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control data holding area 90190 shown in FIG. 32 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 90191, an effect control timer setting unit 90192, an effect control counter setting unit 90193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 90194. There is.

The effect control flag setting unit 90191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 905 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 90191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 90192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 905. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 90192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 90193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 90193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 90194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 90194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the present embodiment, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 90194A as shown in FIG. 32B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. The start winning command receiver 90194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “8”) of the total number of reserved storages. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, the variable category command , A set of four commands, a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. A storage area is secured in the start winning command receive command buffer 90194A so that these start opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category commands, and hold storage number notification commands can be stored in association with each other.

The effect control CPU 90120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the start winning from the beginning in the free area of the start winning command buffer 90194A. At the time of starting winning, commands are transmitted in the order of starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command, and hold storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command reception is performed normally, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, and the variation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "8". It will be stored in the order of category command and hold storage number notification command. The command stored in the start winning command buffer 90194A shown in FIG. 32 (B) is the first storage area (the area corresponding to the buffer number "1") every time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. It is deleted from what is stored in, and the subsequent stored contents are shifted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the data constituting the pre-reading advance notice buffer 90194B as shown in FIG. 32C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The read-ahead notice buffer 90194B is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to each data constituting the start winning command buffer 90194A. That is, in the look-ahead notice buffer 90194B, the decision contents regarding the look-ahead notice effect regarding the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 90120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "8". .. For example, when the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the start winning command buffer 90194A due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol, the read-ahead notice buffer 90194B , The content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. Further, when the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is shifted to another buffer number in the start winning command buffer 90194A due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol, etc. In the reading notice buffer 90194B, the content associated with the buffer number is also shifted to the other buffer number.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the present embodiment will be described.

When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 9011, the game control microcomputer 90100 is started, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 90102 is cleared. In addition, the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupts are permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko game machine 901 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 90103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 33 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 90110. The state of the detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 9022B and the count switch 9023 is determined (step S9011). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main side error process (including sensor error notification process), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step). S9012).

Following the process of step S9012, the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined information output process to supply jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901. Data such as is output (step S9013).

Following the information output process in step S9013, the CPU 90103 executes a game random number update process (step S9014). In the game random number update process in step S9014, for example, at least a part of the game random numbers (for example, random number values MR1'to MR5') used on the main board 9011 side is updated by software. As an example, the CPU 90103 may update numerical data indicating a game random number counted by a random counter of the game control counter setting unit 90154 by software.

Following the game random number update process in step S9014, the CPU 90103 executes a special symbol process process (step S9015). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol are updated. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation on the display device 904B and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening on the special variable winning ball device 907 according to a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process processing, the CPU 90103 executes the normal symbol process processing (step S9016). By executing the normal symbol process processing, the display operation on the normal symbol display 9020 (for example, turning on and off the segment LED) is controlled, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B It enables the tilting operation setting of.

Following the normal symbol process process, the CPU 90103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 9011 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 9012 (step S9017). As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 90105, the effect control corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 9012, set the predetermined control data in the output port of the effect control INT signal and turn on the effect control INT signal for a predetermined time. It is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table by turning it off from. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process process executed in step S9015 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 33. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes the start winning determination process (step S90101). FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S90101 of the special symbol process process (step S9015) shown in FIG. 34.

In the start winning determination process (step S90101) shown in FIG. 35, the CPU 90103 first receives a detection signal from the first start opening switch 9022A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 9022A is ON (step S90201). When it is determined in step S90201 that the first start port switch 9022A is ON (step S90201; YES), the CPU 90103 has a predetermined number of first special figure hold storage (number of hold of the first special figure game). It is determined whether or not it is the upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S90202). The CPU 90103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154.

When it is determined in step S90202 that the number of reserved first special figure is not the upper limit value (step S90202; NO), the CPU 90103 has a storage value (starting) of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155. “1” is set in the mouth buffer value) (step S90207). Following the process of step S90207, the CPU 90103 executes the start winning process (FIG. 36) (step S90208), and sets (clears) "0" in the start port buffer value (step S90209).

When it is determined in step S90201 that the first start port switch 9022A is not on (step S90201 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S90202 that the number of reserved first special figures has reached the upper limit. (Step S90202 (YES)), after executing the process of step S90209, the CPU 90103 is from the second start opening switch 9022B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B. Based on the detection signal, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 9022B is ON (step S90203). When it is determined in step S90203 that the second start port switch 9022B is on (step S90203; YES), the CPU 90103 has a predetermined number of second special figure hold storage (number of hold of second special figure game). It is determined whether or not it is the upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S90204). The CPU 90103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154.

When it is determined in step S90204 that the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is not the upper limit value (step S90204; NO), the CPU 90103 uses the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 (start “2” is set in the mouth buffer value) (step S90210). Following the process of step S9021, the CPU 90103 executes the start winning process (FIG. 36) (step S90211), sets (clears) the start port buffer value to "0" (step S90212), and performs the start winning determination process. To finish.

When it is determined in step S90203 that the second start port switch 9022B is not on (step S90203 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S90204 that the number of reserved second special figures has reached the upper limit. (Step S90204 (YES)) ends the start winning determination process without performing the processes of steps S90210, S9021, and S90212.

According to the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 35, even when the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B simultaneously detect the start prize of the game ball, the process based on the respective detections. Can be completed.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning process (step S90208, step S90211). In the start winning process shown in FIG. 36, the CPU 90103 first updates the number of special figure hold storages corresponding to the start port buffer value by 1 (step S90215). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S90215, the total number of reserved storages is updated to be added by 1 (step S90216). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154, may be updated to be added by 1.

Following the process of step S90216, the CPU 90103 determines the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 90104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 90154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2'for determination and the random number value MR3' for determining the variation category are extracted (step S90217). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit 90151 corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S90218). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1'to MR3' is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A, while the start port buffer value is "2". Occasionally, numerical data indicating random values MR1'to MR3' is set in the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B. Further, the reserved specific information storage unit 90151C stores information according to the start port buffer value.

Following the process of step S90218, the CPU 90103 makes a setting for transmitting the start port winning notification command according to the start port buffer value to the effect control board 9012 (step S90219). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting the first start port winning notification command is made. Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting the second start port winning notification command is made. The start opening winning notification command set in step S90219 is mainly generated by executing the command control process (step S9017) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 33, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted from the board 9011 to the effect control board 9012.

Following the process of step S90219, the CPU 90103 executes a winning random number value determination process (step S90220). After that, the CPU 90103 makes a setting for transmitting the hold storage number notification command (step S90221). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting the first hold storage number notification command is made. Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting the second hold storage number notification command is made. Then, the process at the time of starting and winning is completed. The hold storage number notification command set in step S90221 is obtained by, for example, executing the command control process (step S9017) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 33 after the special symbol process process is completed. , Is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220). In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 37 (A), the CPU 90103 first identifies the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (step S90401). In the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 identifies whether or not the game is in the big hit game state by checking the state of the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152. Specifically, the CPU 90103 specifies that it is in the jackpot gaming state when the jackpot flag is on, and specifies that it is not in the jackpot gaming state when the jackpot flag is not in the on state (when it is in the off state). Further, in the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 identifies whether it is in the high base state or the low base state by checking the state of the high base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152. Specifically, the CPU 90103 specifies that the high base flag is in the high base state when it is in the on state, and identifies it as the low base state when the high base flag is not in the on state (when it is in the off state). .. Further, in the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 may specify whether it is in the high accuracy state or the low accuracy state by confirming the state of the high accuracy flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152. Good. Specifically, the CPU 90103 identifies the high-accuracy state when the high-accuracy flag is on, and identifies the low-accuracy state when the high-accuracy flag is not on (when it is off). You may.

The CPU 90103 sets the high base flag to the ON state in the jackpot end process (step S90117). Further, the CPU 90103 clears the high base flag to the off state in the special symbol stop process (step S90113). For example, the CPU 90103 sets an initial value of zero to the fluctuation counter that is compared with the number of time reductions in the jackpot end processing, and updates (counts up) the value of the fluctuation counter when a loss occurs in the special symbol stop processing. At the same time, when the value of the fluctuation counter reaches the number of time reductions, the high base flag is cleared to the off state. Further, the CPU 90103 sets the high accuracy flag to the ON state in the jackpot end processing. Further, the CPU 90103 clears the high accuracy flag to the off state in the special symbol stop processing. For example, the CPU 90103 sets an initial value of zero to the fluctuation counter that is compared with the number of STs in the jackpot end processing, and updates (counts up) the value of the fluctuation counter when a loss occurs in the special symbol stop processing. At the same time, when the value of the fluctuation counter reaches the high probability count, the high probability flag is cleared to the off state. The value of the fluctuation counter is stored in, for example, the game control counter setting unit 90154.

Following the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not it is currently in the jackpot gaming state (step S90402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is specified that the game is in the big hit game state in the process of step S90401. When it is determined in step S90402 that the game is not in the jackpot gaming state (step S90402; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not it is currently in the high base state (step S90403). That is, it is determined whether or not the high base state is specified in the process of step S90401.

When it is determined in step S90402 that the game is in a big hit game state (step S90402; YES), or when it is determined in step S90403 that it is in a high base state (step S90403; YES), the CPU 90103 determines the start port buffer value. Is determined to be "2" (step S90404). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the second starting prize (starting prize in which the variable special figure is the second special figure). When it is determined in step S90404 that the start port buffer value is not "2" (step S90404; NO), the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S90403 that the base state is not high (step S90403 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S90404 that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S90404 (YES)), The CPU 90103 sets (selects) a special figure display result determination table according to the current gaming state (step S90405). Specifically, when the CPU 90103 is not in the high-accuracy state, the table data for the low-accuracy state (values in the range of "8000" to "8329" are "big hits" from the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 28. The table data assigned to the special figure display result is set, and when the high accuracy state is set, the table data for the high accuracy state ("8000" to "8818") is displayed from the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. Set the table data assigned to the special figure display result whose range value is "big hit". Note that the CPU 90103 identifies that the high accuracy flag is in the high accuracy state when the high accuracy flag is on, and the high accuracy flag is set. When it is not in the on state (when it is in the off state), it may be specified as a low probability state. Further, a display result determination table different between the first special figure and the second special figure (first special figure display result determination). When using the table, the second special figure display result determination table), if the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table is used, and the start port buffer value is "2". In some cases, the second special figure display result determination table may be used.

Following the process of step S90405, the CPU 90103 has numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S90217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 36 within a predetermined jackpot determination range. It is determined whether or not (step S90406). For example, the CPU 90103 uses numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'and individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table data set in step S90405 one by one. By comparison, it is determined whether or not there is a determination value that matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR1'. Alternatively, the CPU 90103 performs the minimum value (lower limit) of the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'and the special figure display result determination table data set in step S90405. The value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) may be compared to determine whether or not the numerical data indicating the random value MR1'is within the range of the minimum value and the maximum value of the determination value.

When it is determined in step S90406 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S90406; YES), the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type extracted in step S90217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 36 is used. The jackpot type is determined based on the indicated numerical data (step S90407). Specifically, first, the CPU 90103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified by the start port buffer value. Set (select) the jackpot type determination table. Specifically, the CPU 90103 sets the table data according to the fluctuation special figure from the jackpot type determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 29. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 compares, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type with the determination value of each jackpot type in the table data for determining the jackpot type set according to the fluctuation special chart. Then, the jackpot type that matches the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2'may be determined.

Following the process of step S90407, the CPU 90103 makes a setting for transmitting a symbol designation command according to the determination result of the process of step S90407 to the effect control board 9012 (step S90408). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S90406 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step S90406; NO), a setting is made to transmit a symbol designation command according to the loss to the effect control board 9012 (step). S90409). The symbol designation command set in step S90409 is mainly generated by executing the command control process (step S9017) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 33, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted from the board 9011 to the effect control board 9012.

After executing the process of step S90408 or the process of step S90409, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not it is in the high base state (step S90410). When it is determined in step S90410 that the high base state is not present (step S90410; NO), that is, in the scene 1 or the scene 3, the CPU 90103 is for the low base state according to the special figure display result. The variable category determination table is set (selected) (step S90411). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S90410 that the base state is high (step S90410; YES), that is, in the scene 2 or the scene 4, the CPU 90103 is in the high base state according to the special figure display result. The variable category determination table for is set (selected) (step S90412).

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a selection example of the variable category determination table. FIG. 38A is a selection example in which one of the variable category determination tables is selected from the plurality of variable category determination tables in the low base state. According to FIG. 38 (A), when the special figure display result is "missing" in the low base state, three types of variable category determination tables ("C-TBL1" and "C" in the figure are used according to the number of reserved storages. -TBL2 "" C-TBL3 ")), one of the variable category determination tables is selected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38 (A), the variable category determination table "C-TBL1" is selected when the number of reserved storages is 0 or 1, and when the number of reserved storages is 2 or 3. The variable category determination table "C-TBL2" is selected, and when the number of reserved storages is 4 or more, the variable category determination table "C-TBL3" is selected. Further, according to FIG. 38 (A), when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" in the low base state, one type of variable category determination table ("C-TBL4" in the figure) regardless of the number of reserved storages. ) Is selected.

FIG. 38B is a selection example in which one of the variable category determination tables is selected from the plurality of variable category determination tables in the high base state. According to FIG. 38 (B), when the special figure display result is set to "miss" in the high base state, two types of variable category determination tables ("C-TBL1" and "C" in the figure are used according to the number of reserved storages. -TBL3 "), one of the variable category determination tables is selected. Further, according to FIG. 38 (B), when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" in the high base state, one type of variable category determination table ("C-TBL5" in the figure) regardless of the number of reserved storages. ) Is selected.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the variable category determination table. FIG. 39 (A) is the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B). Variable category determination table "C-TBL1" in FIG. 39 (A) (variable category determination table "C-TBL2" in FIG. 39 (B), variable category determination table "C-TBL3" in FIG. 39 (C), FIG. 39 The variable category determination table "C-TBL4" in (D) and the variable category determination table "C-TBL5" in FIG. 39 (E) are also numerical values (determined) to be compared with the random number value MR3'for determining the variable category. Values) are assigned to multiple variable categories.

For example, in the setting example of the variable category determination table "C-TBL1" in FIG. 39 (A), 0 out of 100 determination values (values in the range of "0" to "99") of the random value MR3'. Are assigned to the variable category "PA1'", 70 (values in the range "0" to "69") are assigned to the variable category "PA2'", and 27 (values in the range "70" to "96"). Value) is assigned to the variable category "PA3'", two (values in the range "97" to "98") are assigned to the variable category "PA4'", and one (value "99") is assigned to the variable category. It is assigned to "PA5'". That is, in the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table "C-TBL1" in FIG. 39 (A), the fluctuation category "PA1'" is 0% (0 ÷ 100) and the fluctuation category "PA2'" is 70% (70 ÷ 100). ), The variable category "PA3'" is determined by 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variable category "PA4'" is determined by 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variable category "PA5'" is determined by 1% (1 ÷ 100). Will be done.

The variable category determination table “C-TBL2” shown in FIG. 39 (B), the variable category determination table “C-TBL3” shown in FIG. 39 (C), and the variable category determination table “C” shown in FIG. 39 (D). -TBL4 ”and the variation category determination table“ C-TBL5 ”shown in FIG. 39 (E) are the same, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Return to FIG. 37 (A). In the process of step S90411 to be executed when it is determined in step S90410 that the state is not in the high base state, the variable category determination table is executed when the CPU 90103 determines in step S90406 that the special figure display result is a "big hit". If the table data constituting "C-TBL4" is set and it is determined that the special figure display result is "missing", the variable category determination table "C-TBL1" to the variable category determination according to the number of reserved storages. Set the table data constituting any one of the tables "C-TBL3". Further, in the process of step S90412 to be executed when it is determined in step S90410 that the high base state is set, if the CPU 90103 determines in step S90406 that the special figure display result is a "big hit", it is a variable category. If the table data constituting the determination table "C-TBL5" is set and it is determined that the special figure display result is "missing", the category determination table "C-TBL1" or the variation is changed according to the number of reserved storages. Set the table data that constitutes any of the category determination table "C-TBL3".

After executing the process of step S90411 or the process of step S90412, the CPU 90103 determines (determines) the variable category based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3'for determining the variable category (step S90413). Specifically, the CPU 90103 has numerical data indicating the random number value MR3'for determining the variation category extracted in step S90217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 36, and the variation set in step S90411 or step S90412. It may be determined which of the determination values matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR3'by comparing the table data of the category determination table with the determination values assigned to the respective variable categories. Following the process of step S90413, the CPU 90103 transmits one of the variable category commands shown in FIG. 37 (B) to the effect control board 9012 according to the determination result (decision result) of the process of step S90413. After making the setting for (step S90414), the random value determination process at the time of winning is completed.

Following the start winning determination process (step S90101), the CPU 90103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S90110 to S90117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152. (See FIG. 34).

The special symbol normal process in step S90110 is a process executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. The special symbol normal process includes a process of determining (predetermining) whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result is determined in advance, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1".

The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. The variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the variation pattern, a setting process for transmitting a variation pattern specification command, a variable display result notification command, a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), and the like. There is. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

The special symbol variation process in step S90112 is a process executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation processing includes processing for varying (variable display) the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the elapsed time after the start of the variation is the special symbol variation time (FIG. 27). It includes processing to determine whether or not it has been reached. In the special symbol variation processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" when the elapsed time after the start of the variation reaches the special symbol variation time.

The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is a process executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. The special symbol stop process is a process of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol, and the jackpot flag is turned off. (When it is determined in advance that the variable display result is "missing" in the special symbol normal processing (step S90110)), a processing for transitioning the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and a jackpot flag Includes a setting process for sending a hit start specification command (fan flag command) as a process to be executed when is on (when it is determined in advance that the variable display result is a "big hit"). .. In the special symbol stop processing, when the jackpot flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and when the jackpot flag is on, the special figure process flag is updated. Update the value of to "4".

The jackpot release pre-processing in step S90114 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to open (for example, setting a solenoid drive signal for the solenoid 9082 for the jackpot door to open the big winning opening). , Includes setting processing for sending notification commands such as the opening of the big winning door. In the jackpot opening preprocessing, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The process of opening the jackpot in step S90115 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is large based on whether or not the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening has passed a predetermined time and whether or not the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023 has reached a predetermined number. For the process of determining the timing to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state and the setting for closing the large winning opening (for example, the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door for closing the large winning opening). It includes processing to set the solenoid drive signal, etc., and setting processing to send a notification command after opening the big winning opening. In the process of opening the jackpot, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6".

The process after opening the jackpot in step S90116 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The big hit post-opening process is a process to determine whether the number of executions of the round that opens the big winning opening has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or when the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has not been reached. As a process to be executed, it includes a setting process for sending a notification command during opening of the big winning opening, and a setting process for sending a hit end specification command as a process to be executed when the maximum number of times the winning opening is opened is reached. I'm out. In the jackpot opening post-processing, when the number of rounds executed has not reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and when the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening is reached, The value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7".

The jackpot end process in step S90117 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process is a process for determining whether or not the jackpot end effect waiting time (waiting time corresponding to the ending effect execution period) has elapsed, and a process to be executed when the jackpot end effect waiting time has elapsed. It includes a process of setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to a high accuracy and high base state, a process of setting the number of STs and the number of time reductions, and the like. In the jackpot end process, when the waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect elapses, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value.

Further, the big hit opening process (step S90115), the big hit opening post-processing (step S90116), the big hit opening pre-processing (step S90114), and the big hit end processing (step S90117) are big prizes when the count switch 9023 is turned on. Includes send settings for sending oral prize notification commands.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal processing (step S90110). In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 40, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the total number of pending storages is “0” (step S90230). For example, in the process of step S90230, the total number of reserved memory count values stored in the game control counter setting unit 90154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the total number of pending storages is other than "0" in step S90230 (step S90230; NO), whether or not the pending data to be digested first (the first winning pending data) is the second reserved information. Determine (step S90231). For example, in the process of step S90231, whether or not the information stored in the hold specific information storage unit 90151C corresponding to the hold number "1" is the information indicating that it is the second hold information. You just have to judge.

When the hold data first digested in step S90231 is the second hold information (step S90231; YES), the hold stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 90151B corresponding to the hold number "1". As data, the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S90232). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S90232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and updating, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure reserved storage is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1'to MR3' stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the part 90151B is raised one entry at a time. (Step S90233). Further, in the process of step S90233, the hold specific information storage unit 90151C shifts the information stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" one entry at a time. Further, in the process of step S90233, the game control counter setting unit 90154 updates the total reserved memory count value stored by the total reserved memory counter to be subtracted by 1. Following the process of step S90233, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S90234).

When the hold data first digested in step S90231 is not the second hold information (step S90231; NO), the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 90151A corresponding to the hold number "1". As a result, the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S90236). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S90236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updating, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure reserved storage is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1'to MR3' stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the part 90151A is higher by one entry. (Step S90237). Further, in the process of step S90237, the hold specific information storage unit 90151C shifts the information stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" one entry at a time. Further, in the process of step S90237, the game control counter setting unit 90154 updates the total reserved memory count value stored by the total reserved memory counter to be subtracted by 1. Following the process of step S90237, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S90238).

After executing any of the processes of steps S90234 and S90238, the CPU 90103 sets (selects) a special figure display result determination table according to the current gaming state (step S90239). For example, the CPU 90103 may set the special figure display result determination table in the same manner as in step S90405 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. 37 (A). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 uses the special figure based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation and the special figure display result determination table set in step S90239. The display result is determined (step S90240). In the process of step S90240, the CPU 90103 is set with the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'in step S90239 as in step S90406 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. 37 (A). In the table data for determining the special figure display result, the special figure display result ("big hit" or "missing" is determined by comparing each judgment value assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" one by one. Or) should be decided.

Following the process of step S90240, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S90240 is a "big hit" (step S90241). If it is determined in step S90241 that it is a "big hit" (step S90241; YES), the CPU 90103 sets the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 to the ON state (step S90242). The jackpot flag is cleared (reset) to the off state in the jackpot end process of step S90117. Following the process in step S90242, the CPU 90103 executes a jackpot type determination process (S90244). The jackpot type determination process in step S90244 is the same as the jackpot type determination process executed in step S90407 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. 37 (A). Following the jackpot type determination process in step S90244, the CPU 90103 is a storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in, for example, the game control buffer setting unit 90155, corresponding to the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process in step S90244. The jackpot type buffer value is set (step S90245). That is, what is the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process in step S90244 is stored. As an example, the CPU 90103 sets the jackpot type buffer value to "1" if the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process in step S90244 is "16R probability variation jackpot", and if it is "8R probability variation jackpot", the jackpot type Set the buffer value to "2".

When it is determined in step S90241 that it is not a "big hit" (step S90241 (NO)), or after the process of step S90245 is executed, the CPU 90103 determines the special figure display result determined in the process of step S90240, or In the case of a big hit, a fixed special symbol is set corresponding to the big hit type determined in the process of step S90244 (step S90248). After the finalized special symbol is set in step S90248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S90249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. ..

When the total number of reserved storages is "0" in step S90230 (step S90230; YES), the demo display setting (step S90250) is executed, and the special symbol normal processing is terminated. In the demo display setting of step S90250, a customer waiting demo designation command for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 905 is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. On the other hand, it is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table referred to in the variation pattern setting process (step S90111). In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 90103 determines the variation category as in the process of step S90413 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. 37 (A), and the variation pattern corresponding to the determined variation category. The determination table is selected (set), and the variation pattern is determined using the selected variation pattern determination table. For example, when the CPU 90103 determines the variation category "PA2'", the CPU 90103 selects the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category "PA2'" shown in FIG. 41 (B), and a random number value for determining the variation pattern. When the numerical data indicating MR5'is in the range of "0" to "39", the fluctuation pattern "PA2'-1" is determined, and when it is in the range of "40" to "99", the fluctuation pattern "PA2'-" 2 ”is decided. Further, for example, when the CPU 103 determines the variation category "PA3'", the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category "PA3'" shown in FIG. 41 (C), and disturbs the variation pattern determination. When the numerical data indicating the numerical value MR5'is in the range of "0" to "79", the fluctuation pattern "PA3'-1" is determined, and when the numerical data is in the range of "80" to "99", the fluctuation pattern "PA3'" is determined. -2 "is decided. The same applies when other variable categories are determined.

According to FIGS. 27, 28, 38, 39, 41, etc., the relationship between the normal reach and the jackpot expectation of the super reach is super reach β> super reach α> normal reach. Further, in the normal reach, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the case with the pseudo-continuous fluctuation than in the case without the pseudo-continuous fluctuation. In Super Reach α (same for Super Reach β), the expectation of a big hit is higher in the case with pseudo-ream fluctuation than in the case without pseudo-ream fluctuation, and once in the case where the number of pseudo-ream is 2 times. Expectations are higher than in the case.

The random number value MR5'for determining the variation pattern may be extracted at the time of executing the process, or the random value MR3'for determining the variation category may be extracted at the time of starting winning process (step S90208, step S90211). It may be extracted in step S90217 to be reserved data, and may be read out in step S90232 (or step S90236) of the special symbol normal processing (step S90110).

In the present embodiment, the set value of the number of STs (probability variation) and the set value of 70 times are set to the same value (both 70 times), but the set value of the number of STs (probability variation) and the time reduction are set. The number of times may be different from the set value of 70 times. Further, in the present embodiment, the set value of the ST number (probability variation number) in the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot and the set value of the ST number (probability variation number) in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot are set to the same value (both 70 times). However, the set value of the number of STs (probability variation number) in the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot and the set value of the ST number (probability variation number) in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot may be different values. Further, in the present embodiment, the set value of the number of time reductions in the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot and the set value of the number of time reductions in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot are set to the same value (both 70 times), but in the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot. The set value of the number of time reductions in the above and the set value of the number of time reductions in the case of a 16R probability variation jackpot may be different values.

Next, the operation on the effect control board 9012 will be described.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process. When the effect control board 9012 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in FIG. 42.

In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S9071), clears the RAM 90122, sets various initial values, and mounts the effect control board 9012. Set the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit). After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is in the ON state (step S9072). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, the CTC register setting. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is not in the ON state (step S9072; NO), the process of step S9072 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 9012 side, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like is generated from the main board 9011 in addition to the timer interrupt. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but interrupts when using a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 90125, a control that becomes an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015. Capture the signal.

The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. After that, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

When it is determined in step S9072 that the timer interrupt flag is in the on state (step S9072; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 clears the timer interrupt flag and turns it off (step S9073). The command analysis process is executed (step S9074). In the command analysis process executed in step S9074, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading thereof. Settings and controls corresponding to the issued production control commands are performed.

Following the command analysis process in step S9074, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an error notification process (step S9075). In the error notification process of step S9075, for example, an error notification corresponding to a magnetic anomaly notification designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is performed for an act of illegally guiding the game ball to the winning opening by using a magnet.

Following the error notification process in step S9075, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control process process (step S9076). In the effect control process process of step S9076, various effect devices (for example, image display device 905, speaker 908, lamp 909, movable accessory 9017, etc.) are used based on the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 9011. Judgments, decisions, settings, etc. regarding the existing production operation are performed.

Following the effect control process process in step S9076, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect random number update process (step S9077). In the effect random number update process in step S9077, for example, at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 9012 side is updated by software. As an example, the effect control CPU 90120 may update numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random number of the effect control counter setting unit 90193 by software. After that, the process returns to step S9072.

It has been explained that the interrupt for receiving the effect control command or the like from the main board 9011 on the effect control board 9012 side is an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. However, the method of generating an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like is not limited to the above. For example, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like may be generated by an interrupt request by the first bit of serial communication.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process (step S9074). In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 90120 first confirms the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer, and thus receives commands from the main board 9011 transmitted via the relay board 9015. It is determined whether or not there is (step S90501). If it is determined that there is no receive command (step S90501; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the command analysis process.

When it is determined in step S90501 that there is a reception command (step S90501; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the reception command is the first start opening winning notification command (step S90502). .. The effect control CPU 90120 may, for example, confirm the MODE data of the reception command and specify the type of the reception command (see FIG. 25).

When it is determined in step S90502 that the command is the first start opening winning notification command (step S90502; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the first hold storage number notification waiting time (step S90503). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 may set a preset timer initial value as the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 90192.

If it is determined in step S90502 that the command is not the first start opening winning notification command (step S90502; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the receiving command is the second starting opening winning notification command. (Step S90504). When it is determined in step S90504 that the command is the second start opening winning notification command (step S90504; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the second hold storage number notification waiting time (step S90505). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 may set a predetermined timer initial value as the reception waiting time of the second hold storage number notification command in the command reception control timer.

If it is determined in step S90504 that the command is not the second start opening winning notification command (step S90504; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the reception command is a symbol designation command (step S90506). ). If it is determined in step S90506 that it is not a symbol designation command (step S90506; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the received command is a variable category command (step S90507). If it is determined in step S90507 that it is not a variable category command (step S90507; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the received command is the first hold storage number notification command (step S90508). ). When it is determined in step S90508 that it is the first hold storage number notification command (step S90508; YES), for example, by initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer, the first hold storage number notification waiting time Is cleared (step S90509).

If it is determined in step S90508 that it is not the first hold storage number notification command (step S90508; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command. (Step S90510). When it is determined in step S90510 that the command is the second hold storage number notification command (step S90510; YES), for example, by initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer, the second hold storage number notification waiting time is reached. Is cleared (step S90511).

When it is determined in step S90506 that it is a symbol designation command (step S90506 (YES)), when it is determined in step S90507 that it is a variable category command (step S90507 (YES)), step S90503, step S90505, After executing either of the processes of step S90509 and step S90511, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the received command at the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 90194A (step S90512). Following the process of step S90512, the process returns to the process of step S90501.

If it is determined in step S90510 that the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command (step S90510; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the reception command is a variation pattern specification command. (Step S90513). If it is determined that the command is a variation pattern specification command (step S90513; YES), the effect control CPU 90201 stores the variation pattern specification command in the variation pattern specification command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90515). .. Following the process of step S90515, the process returns to the process of step S90501.

When it is determined in step S90513 that the reception command is not a variation pattern designation command (step S90513; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 makes settings and the like according to the other reception commands (step S90518). For example, when the reception command is a game state designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 may analyze the game state designation command to specify the current game state. Following the process of step S90518, the process returns to the process of step S90501.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process (step S9076). In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 44, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a winning effect determination process (step S90150). In the winning effect determination process, the effect control CPU 90120 checks the stored contents in the start winning command buffer 90194A, and determines whether or not the start opening winning notification command is received as a reception command. , Processes for determining various effects are executed.

Following the winning effect determination process (step S90150), the effect control CPU 90120 selects any of the processes of steps S90170 to 90177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191 or the like. And execute.

The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”, which is the initial value. The variable display start waiting process displays an image based on whether or not a first fluctuation start command (or a second fluctuation start command), a fluctuation pattern specification command, a variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 9011 are received. It includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative pattern in the device 905. In the variable display start waiting process, when it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (that is, when a variable pattern specification command or the like is received), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. The variable display start setting process is a setting for performing variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 905 in response to the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B (for example). , Processing to perform production control patterns corresponding to fluctuation patterns (special figure fluctuation time), setting of fluctuation time timer values, etc., and settings to perform display operations such as hold display and active display (for example, the display operation). It includes processing for setting the effect control pattern corresponding to the above). In the variable display start setting process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. The effect processing during variable display is whether or not the variable time timer set in the variable display start setting process (step S90171) has timed out (the elapsed time after the start of variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 905 is the special figure variation time. It includes a process to determine (whether or not it has reached). In the variable display effect processing, when the fluctuation time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

The special figure hit waiting process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The special figure hit waiting process is a variable game state setting process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 as a process to be executed when the confirmed decorative symbol is "missing", or when the confirmed decorative symbol is "big hit". The process to be executed includes a process of setting a fanfare effect (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect). In the special figure hit waiting process, when the final decoration symbol is "missing", the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and when the final decoration symbol is "big hit", the effect process flag is set. Update the value to "4".

The jackpot start process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. The jackpot start process is a process of determining whether or not a notification command for opening the big prize opening is received, and a process for executing when a notification command for opening the big winning opening is received (special variable winning in each round). It includes a process of setting (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to an effect during opening) for performing an effect (for example, an effect to be executed when the ball device 907 is in the open state). In the jackpot start process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" when the jackpot opening notification command is received.

The process during the round of step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. During the round, the process is closed as a process to determine whether or not the notification command after opening the big prize opening has been received, and a process to be executed when the notification command after opening the big winning opening is received (special variable winning in each round). It includes a process of setting (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during closure) for performing an effect (for example, an effect to be executed when the ball device 907 is in the closed state). In the process during the round, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "6" when the notification command is received after the opening of the big winning opening.

The round post-processing in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. The round post-processing is a process of determining whether or not a large winning opening opening notification command or a winning end designation command has been received, and a processing of opening as a process to be executed when a large winning opening opening notification command is received. Settings (for example, setting the effect control pattern corresponding to the open effect) and settings for performing the ending effect as the process to be executed when the hit end specification command is received (for example, for the ending effect). It includes processing for performing the corresponding effect control pattern, setting the value of the ending effect execution time timer, etc.). In the round post-processing, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" when the notification command for opening the big winning opening is received, and the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7" when the hit end specification command is received. To do.

The post-hit process in step S90177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the post-hit processing, whether the ending effect execution time timer set in the round post-processing (step S90176) has timed out (whether the elapsed time after the start of execution of the ending effect in the image display device 5 has reached the set time). Includes processing to determine (whether or not). In the post-hit processing, when the ending effect execution time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the winning effect determination process (S90150). In the winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 90120 first checks the stored contents in the start winning command buffer 90194A (step S90151), and first, as a new reception command, the first start opening winning designation command. Is received (step S90152). When it is determined in step S90152 that the first start opening prize designation command has not been received (step S90152; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 receives the second start opening prize designation command as a new reception command. Whether or not it is determined (step S90154). When it is determined in step S90154 that the second start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S90154; NO), the winning effect determination process ends.

When it is determined in step S90152 that the first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S90152; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191. Then, it is determined whether or not the time is shortened (high accuracy and high base state) (step S90155). When it is determined that the time is not shortened (step S90155: NO), the effect control CPU 90120 executes a hold effect determination process (step S90160). In the process of determining the hold effect, etc. in step S90160 (the same applies to the process of determining the hold effect, etc. in step S90163), there is a process of determining the hold effect, the active display effect, the action effect (hold action failure effect, hold action failure effect, etc.). include. Details will be described later.

After executing the hold effect determination process (step S90160), the effect control CPU 90120 stores the determined content of the hold effect determination process (step S90161). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the content of the hold effect determination process in association with the buffer number of the pre-reading advance notice buffer 90194B corresponding to the start prize buffer number in the start winning command buffer 90194A. Remember.

After executing the process of step S90161, the effect control CPU 90120 adds a new hold display to the start winning prize storage display area 905H based on the determination content stored in step S90161 (step S90162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 displays an effect control pattern in the start winning memory display area 905H for holding display according to the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the pre-reading advance notice buffer 90194B described above. It is determined in the hold effect determination process by setting it as a usage pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123. The hold display displayed in the display mode at the time of addition is added to the start winning memory display area 905H. Then, the production determination process at the time of winning is completed.

When it is determined in step S90154 that the second start opening winning designation command has been received (step S90154; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191. Then, it is determined whether or not the time is shortened (high accuracy and high base state) (step S90156). When it is determined that the time is shortened (high accuracy and high base state) (step S90156: YES), the effect control CPU 90120 executes a hold effect determination process (step S90163). The process of determining the hold effect or the like in step S90163 is the same as the process of determining the hold effect or the like in step S90160.

After executing the hold effect determination process (step S90163), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the processes of step S90163, step S90164, and step S90165, and ends the winning effect determination process. The processes of step S90163, step S90164, and step S90165 are the same as the processes related to the processes of step S90160, step S90161, and step S90162.

When it is determined in step S90155 that the time is shortened (step S90155: YES), or when it is determined in step S90156 that the time is not shortened (step S90156: NO), the hold addition process according to the start opening winning designation is executed. (S90166). Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 has a normal display mode (display mode at the time of addition and after each shift) as in the case where it is determined not to execute the hold effect in the hold effect determination process (steps S90160, S90163). For example, information indicating white) is stored, and a hold display displayed in a normal display mode is added to the start winning memory display area 905H. Then, the production determination process at the time of winning is completed.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process (S90171). In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 90120 first reads, for example, the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 9011, so that the special figure display result is "missed". It is determined whether or not it is (step S90522).

When it is determined in step S90522 that the special symbol display result is "missing" (step S90522; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the combination of the fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) constituting the losing combination (step S90522; YES). Step S90524). As an example, the effect control CPU 90120 has a random number value updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 (for example, a random value for determining a left confirmed symbol, a random value for determining a right confirmed symbol, middle). Numerical data indicating a fixed symbol (random value for determining a fixed symbol, etc.) is extracted, and a predetermined symbol determination table (for example, a left confirmed symbol determination table, a right confirmed symbol determination table, a middle confirmed symbol determination table, etc.) stored in advance in ROM 90121 or the like is extracted. ), Etc., as a combination of the final decorative symbols constituting the loss combination, the decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are determined.

When it is determined in step S90522 that the special figure display result is not "missing" (step S90522; NO), that is, when the special figure display result is "big hit (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot)", it is for effect control. The CPU 90120 determines the combination of the fixed decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination (step S90528). As an example, the effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value (for example, a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmation symbol) updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193, and ROM 90121. By referring to a predetermined symbol determination table (for example, a jackpot confirmation symbol determination table, etc.) stored in advance in the above, as a combination of the final decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R Determine the decorative pattern that will be finally stopped and displayed for each. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 90120 may determine the combination of the fixed decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination depending on which jackpot type (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot) is, and whether or not there is a promotion effect. Good.

After executing either the process of step S90524 or the process of step S90528, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the button development effect determination process (step S90529). The button development effect determination process includes a process of determining whether or not the button development effect (described later) is executed, a process of determining the effect mode of the button development effect when it is determined to execute the button development effect, and the like. The details of the button development effect determination process will be described later.

After executing the process of step S90529, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the hold digestion process (step S90530). Specifically, when the hold display displayed at the left end of the start prize memory display area 905H is moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA', and there is another hold display in the start prize memory display area 905H, respectively. Move to the left.

After executing the hold digestion process in step S90530, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control pattern set process (step S90532). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation as a usage pattern. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 as the usage pattern. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the button development effect determined in the button development effect determination process in step S90529 as a usage pattern. That is, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the button development effect is to be executed in the button development effect determination process in step S90529, the effect control mode (for example, the button development effect pattern described later) and the like are determined. In the process of step S90532, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the button development effect determined in the button development effect determination process of step S90529 is set as the usage pattern. As a result, in the variable display effect processing (S90172), the display operation in the display area of the image display device 905 is performed according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command and the determination content of the button development effect determination process (S90532). (See, for example, FIGS. 52 to 60).

After executing the process of step S90532, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern set in step S90532 (step S90534), and starts the effect control process timer (step S90534). Step S90535), the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 905 is controlled according to the contents of the process data (step S90536). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. 27) specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S90537).

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 digests the commands stored in the start winning command buffer 90194A (step S90538). Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes and deletes the commands (1 set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the start winning command buffer 90194A. The commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the issued command are shifted while maintaining the winning order. Further, in the process of step S90538, the information stored in the read-ahead notice buffer 90194B provided in the RAM 90122 or the like is also deleted or shifted according to the deletion or shift of the command. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S90539), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

The button development effect will be described in detail below. The button development effect is an effect of changing (developing) an image (button image imitating push button 9031B, stick controller image imitating stick controller 9031A) corresponding to a button or the like (push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A). .. Hereinafter, the image corresponding to the button or the like may be referred to as "button or the like image" or "button or the like display".

The effect control CPU 90120 may change the display mode of an image such as one type of button (for example, change the display mode (display color, display size) of a button image) or one type of button as a button development effect. Equal image is changed to another kind of button etc image (for example, button image is changed to stick controller image).

In the following description, as an image of a button or the like, a small-sized white button image imitating a push button 9031B may be referred to as a "small button (white)" or a "first aspect". Further, a large-sized white button image imitating the push button 9031B may be referred to as a "large button (white)" or a "second aspect". Further, a large-sized red button image imitating the push button 9031B may be referred to as a "large button (red)" or a "third mode". Further, a stick controller image imitating the stick controller 9031A may be referred to as a "stick" or a "fourth aspect".

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a button development effect category and a button development effect pattern in the present embodiment. The button development effect pattern indicates an effect mode (display mode) of the button development effect. The button development effect category is a name when the button development effect patterns are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the button development effect category is a group name of each group including one or more button development effect patterns categorized into a common group.

In FIG. 47, “initial” is the initial display. "Final" is the final display. "Timing 1" is the first timing at which the image such as a button can change. "Timing 2" is the second timing at which the image such as a button can change. "Timing 3" is the third timing at which the image such as a button can change. The "timing 1", "timing 2", and "timing 3" may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern.

Further, in FIG. 47 (the same applies to other figures), "no change" indicates that there is no change in the image such as a button. "Weak change" indicates that there is a one-step change (one-step change) in an image such as a button. Specifically, the "weak change (1st → 2nd)" is a one-step change from the "first mode" to the "second mode", that is, from the "small button (white)" to the "large button (white)". It shows that there is a change to. "Weak change (2nd → 3rd)" is a one-step change from "2nd mode" to "3rd mode", that is, a change from "large button (white)" to "large button (red)". It shows that there is. "Weak change (3rd → 4th)" indicates that there is a one-step change from "third mode" to "fourth mode", that is, a change from "large button (red)" to "stick". ing. "Medium change" indicates that there is a two-step change (two-step change) in the image such as a button. Specifically, the "medium change (1st → 3rd)" is a two-step change from the "first mode" to the "third mode", that is, from the "small button (white)" to the "large button (red)". It shows that there is a change to. "Medium change (2nd → 4th)" indicates that there is a two-step change from "second mode" to "fourth mode", that is, a change from "large button (white)" to "stick". ing. "Strong change" indicates that there is a three-step change (three-step change) in the image such as a button. Specifically, "strong change (1st → 4th)" is a 3-step change from "1st mode" to "4th mode", that is, a change from "small button (white)" to "stick". Indicates that there is.

In FIG. 47, in the button development effect category “BH1”, the “final” is the “first mode (small button (small button)” without changing the image such as the button at any of the three timings (timing 1, 2, 3). White)) ”, which is a button development production category. The button development effect pattern "BH1-1" belongs to the button development effect category "BH1".

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH1-1", the image of the button or the like does not change at any of the timing 1, timing 2 and timing 3. The first period ("initial", that is, before "timing 1"), the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2"), and the third period ("timing 2" to "timing 3") are the first. The period 4 (“final”, that is, after “timing 3”) is also the “first mode (small button (white))”.

In the button development production category "BH2", the image of the button or the like changes slightly at any one of the three timings, and the "final" becomes the "second mode (large button (white))". This is a development production category. The button development effect category "BH2" includes a button development effect pattern "BH2-1" with a weak change at timing 1, a button development effect pattern "BH2-2" with a weak change at timing 2, and a weakness at timing 3. The button development production pattern "BH2-3" with a change belongs to it.

For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH2-1", the image of the button or the like changes weakly at the timing 1 and does not change at the timing 2 or the timing 3, so that the image of the button or the like according to the button development effect pattern "BH2-1" changes. , In the first period (before "timing 1"), it becomes "first mode (small button (white))", and in the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2") and the third period ("timing"). 2 ”to“ Timing 3 ”) and the fourth period (“Timing 3” and later) are “second mode (large button (white))”.

In the button development production category "BH3a", the image of the button or the like changes slightly at any two of the three timings, and the "final" becomes the "third mode (large button (red))". It is a development production category. In the present embodiment, the button development effect category "BH3a" includes a button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" having a weak change at timing 1 and timing 3, and a button development effect pattern having a weak change at timing 2 and timing 3. "BH3a-2" belongs to it.

For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1", the button image is weakly changed at timing 1 and timing 3 and does not change at timing 2, so that the button image image by the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is , In the first period (before "timing 1"), it becomes "first mode (small button (white))", and in the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2") and the third period ("timing"). 2 ”to“ Timing 3 ”) is the“ second aspect (large button (white)) ”, and in the fourth period (“Timing 3” or later), it is the “third aspect (large button (red))”.

In the button development production category "BH3b", the image of the button or the like changes in the middle at any one of the three timings, and the "final" becomes the "third mode (large button (red))". It is a development production category. The button development effect category "BH3b" includes a button development effect pattern "BH3b-1" having a medium change at timing 1, a button development effect pattern "BH3b-2" with a medium change at timing 2, and a medium change at timing 3. The button development production pattern "BH3b-3" with a change belongs to it.

For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH3b-1", the image of the button or the like changes in the middle at the timing 1 and does not change at the timing 2 or the timing 3, so that the image of the button or the like according to the button development effect pattern "BH3b-1" is , In the first period (before "timing 1"), it becomes "first mode (small button (white))", and in the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2") and the third period ("timing"). 2 ”to“ Timing 3 ”) and the fourth period (“Timing 3” and later) are “third mode (large button (red))”.

In the button development production category "BH4a", at any two of the three timings, the image of the button etc. changes in the middle at the earlier timing, the image of the button etc. changes slightly at the later timing, and the "final" This is a button development effect category that is the "fourth mode (stick)". In the present embodiment, the button development effect category "BH4a" includes a button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" having a medium change at timing 1 and a weak change at timing 3, a medium change at timing 2, and a weak change at timing 3. There is a button development effect pattern "BH4a-2" to which.

For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1", the image of the button or the like changes in the middle at the timing 1, weakly changes at the timing 3, and does not change at the timing 2, so that the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" is used. The image of the button or the like becomes the "first mode (small button (white))" in the first period (before "timing 1"), and becomes the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2") or the third. In the period ("timing 2" to "timing 3"), it becomes the "third mode (large button (red))", and in the fourth period (after "timing 3"), it becomes the "fourth mode (stick)".

In the button development production category "BH4b", at any two of the three timings, the image of the button etc. changes slightly at the earlier timing, the image of the button etc. changes at the later timing, and the "final" is This is a button development effect category that is the "fourth mode (stick)". In the present embodiment, the button development effect category "BH4b" includes a button development effect pattern "BH4b-1" having a weak change at timing 1 and a medium change at timing 3, a weak change at timing 2, and a medium change at timing 3. There is a button development effect pattern "BH4b-2" to which.

For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4b-1", the image such as the button changes weakly at the timing 1, medium changes at the timing 3, and does not change at the timing 2, so that the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" is used. The image such as a button becomes the "first mode (small button (white))" in the first period (before "timing 1"), and becomes the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2") and the third. In the period (“timing 2” to “timing 3”), it becomes the “second aspect (large button (white))”, and in the fourth period (“timing 3” or later), it becomes the “fourth aspect (stick)”.

In the button development production category "BH4c", the image of the button or the like changes strongly at the timing of any one of the three timings (timing 3 in this embodiment), and the "final" is the "fourth aspect (stick)". It is a button development production category. In the present embodiment, the button development effect category "BH4c" belongs to the button development effect pattern "BH4c-1" which has a strong change at the timing 3.

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4c-1", the image of the button or the like changes strongly at the timing 3 and does not change at the timing 1 or the timing 2. Therefore, the image of the button or the like according to the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" is the first. In the first period (before "timing 1"), the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2"), and the third period ("timing 2" to "timing 3"), the "first mode (small button)" (White)) ”, and in the fourth period (after“ timing 3 ”), it becomes the“ fourth aspect (stick) ”.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the button development effect determination process (S90529). FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the button development effect and the like. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the button development effect pattern. In FIG. 49 (A) (the same applies to other figures), the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X" is a fluctuation pattern of super reach α (loss) (specifically, fluctuation patterns "PA4'-1" and " Either "PA4'-2" or "PA4'-3"). The fluctuation pattern "PA5'-X" is a fluctuation pattern of super reach β (loss) (specifically, any one of the fluctuation patterns "PA5'-1", "PA5'-2", and "PA5'-3"). is there. The fluctuation pattern "PB4'-X" is a fluctuation pattern of super reach α (big hit) (specifically, any one of the fluctuation patterns "PB4'-1", "PB4'-2", and "PB4'-3"). is there. The fluctuation pattern "PB5'-X" is a fluctuation pattern of super reach β (big hit) (specifically, any one of the fluctuation patterns "PB5'-1", "PB5'-2", and "PB5'-3"). is there.

In the button development effect determination process shown in FIG. 48, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not to execute the button development effect (S90550). Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the button development effect based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 49 (A). ..

For example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the button development effect is executed at a rate of 5% when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern "PA4'-X". For example, the ROM 90121 has a button development effect execution presence / absence determination table for super reach α (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern “PA4'-X”. Numerical values that are stored and compared with the random number value for determining whether or not the button development effect is executed (for example, the random number value updated in the effect random number update process (S9077)) are "no execution" and " It suffices if it is assigned to "executed" at a ratio of 5:95.

Further, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the button development effect is executed at a rate of 10% when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern "PA5'-X". For example, the ROM 90121 has a button development effect execution presence / absence determination table for super reach β (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern “PA5'-X”. A numerical value that is stored and compared with a random value for determining whether or not to execute the button development effect may be assigned to "without execution" and "with execution" at a ratio of 10:90.

In the effect control CPU 90120, the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a super reach fluctuation pattern ("PA4'-X", "PA5'-X", "PB4'-X", "PB5'". Button development whenever there is a fluctuation pattern other than (-X ") ("PA1'-X", "PA2'-X", "PA3'-X", "PB1'-X", "PB3'-X") Decide not to perform the production.

According to FIG. 49 (A), when the button development effect is executed, the super reach is always obtained, so that the jackpot expectation is higher when the button development effect is executed than when it is not executed.

In addition, the jackpot expectation when the button development effect is executed in the super reach α in the low probability state is (probability that "executed" in "PB4'-X") x (in the low probability state). Probability of becoming "PB4'-X" at a certain time) / {(Probability of becoming "executed" at "PB4'-X") x (Probability of becoming "PB4'-X" when in a low probability state) It is obtained from + (probability of "execution" in "PA4'-X") x (probability of "PA4'-X" in low probability state)}, and is about 18.5%. The probability of "execution" for "PB4'-X" is 15%, and the probability of "execution" for "PA4'-X" is 5% (FIG. 49 (A)). Further, since the jackpot probability in the low probability state is about 1/199 (see FIG. 28), the probability of becoming "PB4'-X" in the low probability state is (1/199) × (30/100). The probability of becoming "PA4'-X" in the low probability state is (198/199) × (2/100) (see FIGS. 38 and 39). On the other hand, the jackpot expectation when Super Reach α is executed in the low probability state is the probability of becoming "PB4'-X" in the low probability state / (when in the low probability state). It is obtained from the probability of "PB4'-X" + the probability of becoming "PA4'-X" in the low probability state), and is about 7%. From the above, when the button development effect is executed in Super Reach α, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it is not executed.

In addition, when the button development effect is executed in Super Reach β in the low probability state, the jackpot expectation is (probability that "executed" in "PB5'-X") x (in the low probability state). Probability of becoming "PB5'-X" at a certain time) / {(Probability of becoming "executed" at "PB5'-X") x (Probability of becoming "PB5'-X" when in a low probability state) It is obtained from + (probability of becoming "executed" in "PA5'-X") x (probability of becoming "PA5'-X" in a low probability state)}, and is about 50%. The probability of "execution" for "PB5'-X" is 40%, and the probability of "execution" for "PA5'-X" is 10% (FIG. 49 (A)). Further, since the jackpot probability in the low probability state is about 1/199 (see FIG. 28), the probability of becoming "PB5'-X" in the low probability state is (1/199) × (50/100). The probability of becoming "PA5'-X" in the low probability state is (198/199) × (1/100) (see FIGS. 38 and 39). On the other hand, the jackpot expectation when Super Reach β is executed in the low probability state is the probability of becoming "PB5'-X" in the low probability state / (when in the low probability state). It is obtained from the probability of becoming "PB5'-X" + the probability of becoming "PA5'-X" in a low probability state), and is about 20%. From the above, when the button development effect is executed in Super Reach β, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it is not executed.

Return to FIG. 48. After executing the process of step S90550, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the button development effect in the process of step S90550 (S90551). If it is determined not to execute the button development effect (step S90551; NO), the button development effect determination process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the button development effect (step S90551; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button development effect category (S90552). Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button development effect category at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 49 (B) based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command.

For example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button development effect category "BH1" at a rate of 30% when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern "PA4'-X", and the button development effect. The category "BH2" is determined at a rate of 20%, the button development effect category "BH3a" is determined at a rate of 20%, the button development effect category "BH3b" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the button development effect category "BH3a" is determined at a rate of 10%. "BH4a" is determined at a rate of 10%, the button development effect category "BH4b" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the button development effect category "BH4c" is determined at a rate of 0%. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a button development effect category determination table for super reach α (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern “PA4'-X”. Then, in the table, the numerical values to be compared with the random number value for determining the button development effect category (for example, the random number value updated by the effect random number update process (S9077)) are "BH1" and "BH2". It suffices that "BH3a", "BH3b", "BH4a", "BH4b" and "BH4c" are assigned at a ratio of 30:20:20:10:10:10:10.

Further, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button development effect category "BH1" at a rate of 0% when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern "PA5'-X", and the button development The production category "BH2" is determined at a ratio of 30%, the button development production category "BH3a" is determined at a ratio of 20%, the button development production category "BH3b" is determined at a ratio of 20%, and the button development production category is determined. "BH4a" is determined at a rate of 15%, the button development effect category "BH4b" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the button development effect category "BH4c" is determined at a rate of 5%. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a button development effect category determination table for super reach β (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern “PA5'-X”. Then, in the table, the numerical values to be compared with the random value for determining the button development effect category are "BH1", "BH2", "BH3a", "BH3b", "BH4a", "BH4b" and "BH4c". It suffices if they are allotted at a ratio of 0:30:20:20:15: 10: 5.

According to FIG. 49 (B), in the super reach α, the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH4a” or “BH4b” to the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH1” or “BH2” is the fluctuation pattern “PB4”. The case of "-X" is higher than the case of the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X". That is, in the super reach α, when the image such as a button finally changes to the fourth aspect (stick), the first aspect (small button (white)) and the second aspect (large button (white)) Expectations for big hits are higher than when it stops at. Further, in the super reach β, when the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4a" or "BH4b" or "BH4c" is the fluctuation pattern "PB5'-X" with respect to the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH2". Is higher than the case where the fluctuation pattern is "PA5'-X". That is, in the super reach β, the jackpot expectation is higher when the image such as a button finally changes to the fourth mode (stick) than when it stops at the second mode (large button (white)). It was explained that the relationship of the jackpot expectation degree is super reach β> super reach α, but according to FIG. 49 (B), the case where the super reach β is the case is higher than the case where the super reach α is the case. Images such as buttons are likely to change to the fourth aspect in the end. From the above, the jackpot expectation of the fourth aspect (stick)> the jackpot expectation of the third aspect (large button (red))> the jackpot expectation of the second aspect (large button (red))> the first aspect (small button) (White)) is the expected degree of jackpot.

Further, according to FIG. 49 (B), the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH3b" to the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH3a" is a variation pattern when the variation pattern "PB4'-X" is used. It is higher than the case of "PA4'-X", and higher in the case of the fluctuation pattern "PB5'-X" than in the case of the fluctuation pattern "PA5'-X". That is, in the case where the "final" becomes the "third mode" due to one middle change (two-step change) (BH3b), the "final" becomes the "third" due to the two weak changes (one-step change). The jackpot expectation is higher than in the case of "aspect" (BH3a).

Further, according to FIG. 49 (B), the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4c" to the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4a" or "BH4b" is the case where the fluctuation pattern "PB5'-X" is used. This is higher than the case where the fluctuation pattern is "PA5'-X". In other words, when the "final" becomes the "fourth mode" (BH4c) due to one strong change (three-step change), one weak change (one-step change) and one medium change (2). The jackpot expectation is higher than when the "final" becomes the "fourth aspect" (BH4a, BH4b) due to the step change). Further, the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4b" with respect to the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4a" is the case where the variation pattern "PB4'-X" is the variation pattern "PA4'-X". It is higher than that in the case of the fluctuation pattern "PB5'-X" and higher than the case of the fluctuation pattern "PA5'-X". In other words, when the "final" becomes the "third mode" in the order of weak change (1 step change) and medium change (2 step change) (BH4b), medium change (2 step change) and weak change (2 step change) The jackpot expectation is higher than in the case where the "final" becomes the "third mode" (BH4a) in the order of (one-step change).

Return to FIG. 48. After executing the process of step S90552, the effect control CPU 90120 determines one button development effect pattern belonging to the button development effect category determined in step S90552 (S90553).

For example, when the button development effect category “BH2” is determined in step S90552, in the effect control CPU 90120, as shown in FIG. 50 (B), the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “BH2”. When it is "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X", the button development effect pattern "BH2-1" is determined at a rate of 36%, and the button development effect pattern "BH2-2" is determined at a rate of 33%. Then, when the button development effect pattern "BH2-3" is determined at a rate of 31% and the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X", The button development effect pattern "BH2-1" is determined at a rate of 31%, the button development effect pattern "BH2-2" is determined at a rate of 33%, and the button development effect pattern "BH2-3" is determined at a rate of 36%. To decide with. For example, the ROM 90121 has a button development for super reach (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X". The effect pattern (BH2-X) determination table is stored, and the table is compared with a random number value for determining the button development effect pattern (for example, a random number value updated in the effect random number update process (S9077)). Numerical values may be assigned to "BH2-1", "BH2-2", and "BH2-3" at a ratio of 36:33:31. Further, the button development effect pattern (BH2) for super reach (big hit), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X". -X) The determination table is stored, and the numerical values to be compared with the random value for determining the button development effect pattern are 31 in "BH2-1", "BH2-2", and "BH2-3". It suffices if they are assigned at a ratio of: 33: 36.

Further, for example, when the button development effect category "BH3a" is determined in step S90552, the effect control CPU 90120 has the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command as shown in FIG. 50C. When it is "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X", the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined at a rate of 55%, and the button development effect pattern "BH3a-2" is determined at a rate of 45%. When the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X", the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined at a rate of 45%. , Button development effect pattern "BH3a-2" is determined at a rate of 55%. For example, the ROM 121 has a button development for super reach (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X". The effect pattern (BH3a-X) determination table is stored, and in the table, numerical values to be compared with the random value for determining the button development effect pattern are 55:45 for "BH3a-1" and "BH3a-2". It suffices if it is assigned at the ratio of. Further, the button development effect pattern (BH3a) for super reach (big hit), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X". -X) The determination table is stored, and a numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining the button development effect pattern is assigned to "BH3a-1" and "BH3a-2" at a ratio of 45:55. It suffices if it is done.

If the button development effect category "BH1" is determined in step S90552, there is only one type of button development effect pattern belonging to the button development effect category "BH1" (button development effect pattern "BH1-1"). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), the fluctuation patterns specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command are the fluctuation patterns "PA4'-X", "PA5'-X", "PB4'-X", and "PB5'. In any case of "-X", the button development effect pattern "BH1-1" is determined. Further, when the button development effect category "BH4c" is determined in step S90552, there is only one type of button development effect pattern belonging to the button development effect category "BH4c" (button development effect pattern "BH4c-1"). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50 (G), the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X", "PA5'-X", "PB4'-X", "PB5'". In any case of "-X", the button development effect pattern "BH4c-1" is determined.

According to FIG. 50 (B), the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH2-3" to the determination ratio of the button development effect pattern "BH2-1" is the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X". Is higher than the case of the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X". Further, according to FIG. 50C, the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH3a-2" to the determination ratio of the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'. The case of "-X" is higher than the case of the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X". The same applies to FIGS. 50 (D) to 50 (F). That is, the jackpot expectation is higher when the change is made at a later timing than when the change is made at an earlier timing.

Return to FIG. 48. After executing the process of step S90553, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button or the like action effect (simply "action effect" in the figure) (S90554), and ends the button development effect determination process. In the process of step S90554, specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 changes the image such as a button at timings 1 to 3 (“no change”, “weak change”, “medium change”, “strong change”. ), The presence / absence of execution of the action effect such as a button (and the effect mode in the case of execution) is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG.

In the following description, as the button and other action effects performed on the image display device 905, the effect in which the character appears (character appearance) is referred to as the "weak effect effect", and the effect in which the cannon fires (cannon) is referred to as " A production with a lightning strike (lightning strike) may be referred to as a "strong effect production".

For example, when the change mode of the image such as a button at a certain timing (timing 1 to 3) is "no change", the effect control CPU 90120 sets "no action effect" to 70% as shown in FIG. 49 (C). The "weak effect effect" is determined at a rate of 20%, the "medium effect effect" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the "strong effect effect" is determined at a rate of 0%. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a button-like action effect determination table that is referred to when there is no change, and is compared with a random value for determining the button-like action effect in the table. Numerical values may be assigned to "no action effect", "weak action effect", "medium action effect", and "strong action effect" at a ratio of 70:20: 10: 0.

Further, for example, when the change mode of the image such as a button at a certain timing (timing 1 to 3) is "weak change", the effect control CPU 90120 sets "no action effect" to 20 as shown in FIG. 49 (C). It is determined at a rate of%, "weak effect effect" is determined at a rate of 70%, "medium effect effect" is determined at a rate of 8%, and "strong effect effect" is determined at a rate of 2%. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a table for determining the action effect of a button or the like at the time of a weak change, which is referred to when the change is "weak change", and the table is compared with a random value for determining the action effect such as a button. Numerical values may be assigned to "no action effect", "weak action effect", "medium action effect", and "strong action effect" at a ratio of 20: 70: 8: 2.

That is, in step S90553, for example, when the button development effect pattern "BH4b-1" is determined, the timing 1 is "weak change", the timing 2 is "no change", and the timing 3 is "medium change". However (see FIG. 47), in the process of step S90554, the effect control CPU 90120 determines "no action effect" at a rate of 20% for the action effect such as the button for the "weak change" of the timing 1, and "weak effect". "Direction" is determined at a rate of 70%, "Medium action effect" is determined at a rate of 8%, and "Strong action effect" is determined at a rate of 2%. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines "no action effect" at a rate of 70% and "weak effect effect" at a rate of 20% for the action effect such as a button for "no change" at timing 2. The "medium action effect" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the "strong effect effect" is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines "no action effect" at a rate of 5% and "weak effect effect" at a rate of 20% for the action effect such as a button for the "medium change" of the timing 3. The "medium-action effect" is determined at a rate of 55%, and the "strong-action effect" is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, in step S90553, for example, when the button development effect pattern "BH1-1" is determined, all the timings 1 to 3 are "no change" (see FIG. 47), but in the process of step S90554, The effect control CPU 90120 determines "no action effect" at a rate of 70% and "weak effect effect" at a rate of 20% for the action effects such as buttons for each "no change" at timings 1 to 3. Then, the "medium action effect" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the "strong action effect" is determined at a rate of 0%.

According to FIG. 49 (C), when the action effect of the button or the like (weak action effect, medium action effect, strong action effect) is executed, the image of the button or the like changes (weak change, medium change, etc.) as compared with the case where it is not executed. Easy to change). In addition, when the strong action effect is executed, the image such as a button always changes (weak change, medium change, strong change), and when the medium action effect is executed, it is more than when the weak action effect is executed. Images such as buttons are easily changed (weak change, medium change, strong change). In addition, when the strong action effect is executed, it is more likely to change strongly than when the strong action effect is not executed, and when the medium action effect is executed, it is more likely to change medium than when the medium action effect is not executed. When the weak action effect is executed, it is more likely to change weakly than when the weak action effect is not executed.

As described above, in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the button development effect is also set as the usage pattern, so that the effect control CPU 90120 uses the button development effect. The decision content (for example, (button development effect pattern)) determined in the determination process, the effect mode of the action effect such as the button ("no action effect", "weak effect effect", "medium effect effect" in each of timings 1 to 3, Information that identifies the distinction of the "strong action effect") is stored in the RAM 90122 or the like, and in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), the RAM 90122 or the like is referred to, and the effect control corresponding to the effect mode of the button development effect or the like. The pattern may also be set as the pattern to be used.

FIG. 51 (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating various periods in the button development effect. Before explaining FIG. 51 (A), “T1” to “T14” shown in FIGS. 51 to 60 will be described. "T1" represents the start timing of the fluctuation. “T14” represents the end timing of the fluctuation. "T2" represents the timing of reaching. "T3" represents the timing of development into super reach. Super reach developed from "T3" ends in "T13". That is, "T13" represents the timing at which the super reach result (win / loss, etc.) is displayed (notified).

“T4” represents the timing of starting the display of an image such as a button. Images such as buttons displayed from "T4" are deleted by "T13". That is, "T4" to "T13" are button or the like display periods (button or the like image display period).

“T6” represents “timing 1” in FIG. 47. “T8” represents “timing 2” in FIG. 47. “T10” represents “timing 3” in FIG. 47. “T5” represents the timing of starting execution of the button or the like action effect corresponding to the change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) of the button or the like image at the timing 1 (T6). The action effect such as buttons started at "T5" ends at "T6". That is, "T5" to "T6" are execution periods of the button or the like action effect corresponding to the change of the button or the like image at the timing 1. “T7” represents the timing of starting execution of the button or the like action effect corresponding to the change of the button or the like image at the timing 2 (T8). The action effect such as buttons started at "T7" ends at "T8". That is, "T7" to "T8" are execution periods of the button or the like action effect corresponding to the change of the button or the like image at the timing 2. “T9” represents the timing of starting execution of the button or the like action effect corresponding to the change of the button or the like image at the timing 3 (T10). The action effects such as buttons started at "T9" end at "T10". That is, "T9" to "T10" are execution periods of the button or the like action effect corresponding to the change of the button or the like image at the timing 3. In addition, "T11" and "T12" will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 51 (A), a part of the button or the like display period (T4 to T13) (T11 to T13) is the valid period (operation is valid) of the button or the like (push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A). The other period (T4 to T11) is a non-valid period (a period during which the operation is not valid) such as a button. That is, "T11" represents the timing at which the operation of the button or the like becomes effective. During the non-valid period (T4 to T11), a "regulation line" is displayed by superimposing it on an image such as a button as an image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect. During the valid period (T11 to T13), the "regulation line" is not displayed. That is, the "regulation line" is erased at "T11".

The period (T13 to T14) following the button display period (T4 to T13) is a period for displaying the result (win / loss, etc.). More specifically, if there is no operation during the valid period (T11 to T13), when the valid period ends (T13), the image of the button or the like is deleted and the period following the display period of the button or the like (T13 to T14). ), The result is displayed. On the other hand, if there is an operation during the valid period, the image such as a button is deleted when the operation is performed, and the result is displayed from the time when the operation is performed. If there is an operation during the valid period, the valid period ends when the operation is performed. An effect of displaying an image of a button or the like during the valid period (T11 to T13) and displaying a result (win or lose) after the image of the button or the like is deleted may be referred to as an "operation effect".

Each of FIGS. 51 (B) to 53 (B) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific flow of button development effect.

(Specific example 1)
FIG. 51 (B) shows the flow of the button development effect in the first embodiment. In Specific Example 1, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X". Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines in the button development effect determination process (S90529) to execute the button development effect (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH1" (S90552), and determines the button development effect pattern "BH1". -1 ”is determined (S90553), and“ no action effect ”is determined (S90554) for the action effect such as buttons for timing 1 (“no change” in “BH1-1”), and timing 2 (“BH1-1”) is determined. Then, the "weak action effect (character appearance)" is determined for the button action effect for "no change") (S90554), and the "action" for the button action effect for timing 3 ("no change" in "BH1-1"). It is assumed that "no production" has been decided. The determined content is set in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), and the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 51 (B).

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH1-1" determined in the specific example 1, the image of the button or the like has the first period (before "timing 1" / T4 to T6) and the second period ("timing 1" to Small buttons (white) for both "Timing 2" / T6 to T8), the third period ("Timing 2" to "Timing 3" / T8 to T10), and the fourth period ("Timing 3" and later / T10 to T13) ) (See FIG. 47), and since the “regulation line” is displayed during the non-valid period (T4 to T11) regardless of the button development effect pattern, FIG. 51 (B) is shown in Specific Example 1. Button development production is executed as shown. Further, in the specific example 1, since the "weak action effect (character appearance)" is determined for the timing 2 (no change), the character appears in "T7" to "T8", but the image such as the button is not changed. (Failure production).

(Specific example 2)
FIG. 52 (A) shows the flow of the button development effect in the second embodiment. In Specific Example 2, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is assumed to be the variation pattern “PA4'-X". Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines in the button development effect determination process (S90529) to execute the button development effect (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH2" (S90552), and determines the button development effect pattern "BH2". -1 ”is determined (S90553), and“ weak effect effect ”is determined for timing 1 (“weak change (1st → 2nd)” in “BH2-1”), and “weak effect effect” is determined (S90554). Regarding the action effect of buttons and the like for 2 (“no change” in “BH2-1”), “no action effect” is determined (S90554), and the action effect of buttons and the like for timing 3 (“no change” in “BH2-1”). It is assumed that the "weak effect production" has been decided. The determined content is set in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), and the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 52 (A).

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH2-1" determined in the specific example 2, the image such as the button is the "first mode (small button (white)) in the first period (before" timing 1 "/ T4 to T6). ) ”, And the second period (“Timing 1” to “Timing 2” / T6 to T8), the third period (“Timing 2” to “Timing 3” / T8 to T10), and the fourth period (“Timing 2” to “Timing 3” / T8 to T10) After "Timing 3" / T10 to T13), it becomes "second mode (large button (white))" (see FIG. 47), and any button development effect pattern is during the non-valid period (T4 to T11). In order to display the "regulation line" on the screen, in the specific example 2, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 52A. Further, in the specific example 2, since the "weak action effect (character appearance)" is determined for the timing 1 (weak change), the character appears in "T5" to "T6" and the image such as a button is displayed in "T6". The "first mode (small button (white))" is changed to the "second mode (large button (white))" (one-step change) (success production). Further, in the specific example 2, since the "weak action effect (character appearance)" is determined for the timing 3 (no change), the character appears in "T9" to "T10", but the image such as a button is displayed in "T10". Not changed (failure production).

(Specific example 3)
FIG. 52B shows the flow of the button development effect in the specific example 3. In Specific Example 3, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is assumed to be the variation pattern “PB4 ′ -X”. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines in the button development effect determination process (S90529) to execute the button development effect (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH3a" (S90552), and determines the button development effect pattern "BH3a". -2" is determined (S90553), and "no action effect" is determined for the action effect such as buttons for timing 1 ("no change" in "BH3a-2") (S90554), and timing 2 ("BH3a-2"). Then, "no action effect" is determined for the action effect such as buttons for "weak change (1st → 2nd)" (S90554), and "weak change (2nd → 3rd)" in timing 3 ("BH3a-2"). It is assumed that the "weak action effect" has been decided for the action effect such as buttons on "). The determined content is set in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), and the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 52 (B).

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH3a-2" determined in Specific Example 3, the image of the button or the like is the first period (before "timing 1" / T4 to T6) or the second period ("timing 1" to In "timing 2" / T6 to T8), it becomes "first mode (small button (white))", and in the third period ("timing 2" to "timing 3" / T8 to T10), "second mode (large)". Button (white)) ”, and in the fourth period (“Timing 3” and later / T10 to T13), it becomes “third mode (large button (red))” (see FIG. 47), and any button development effect Even if it is a pattern, since the "regulation line" is displayed during the non-valid period (T4 to T11), in the specific example 3, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 52 (B). Further, in the specific example 3, since "no action effect" is determined for the timing 2 (weak change), the image such as a button is displayed in "T8" without the character appearing in "T7" to "T8". The mode (small button (white)) is changed to the "second mode (large button (white))" (one-step change). Further, in the specific example 3, since the "weak action effect (character appearance)" is determined for the timing 3 (weak change), the character appears in "T9" to "T10" and the image such as a button is displayed in "T10". The "second mode (large button (white))" is changed to the "third mode (large button (red))" (one-step change) (success production).

(Specific example 4)
FIG. 53 (A) shows the flow of the button development effect in the specific example 4. In Specific Example 4, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PB5 ′ -X”. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines in the button development effect determination process (S90529) to execute the button development effect (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH4b" (S90552), and determines the button development effect pattern "BH4b". -1 ”is determined (S90553), and“ weak effect effect ”is determined for timing 1 (“weak change (1st → 2nd)” in “BH4b-1”), and “weak effect effect” is determined (S90554). "No action effect" is determined for the action effect such as buttons for 2 ("No change" in "BH4b-1") (S90554), and timing 3 ("Medium change (2nd → 4th)" in "BH4b-1"). It is assumed that the "medium action effect" has been decided for the action effect such as buttons on "). The determined content is set in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), and the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 53 (A).

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4b-1" determined in the specific example 4, the image of the button or the like is "first mode (small button (white)) in the first period (before" timing 1 "/ T4 to T6). ) ”, And in the second period (“Timing 1” to “Timing 2” / T6 to T8) and the third period (“Timing 2” to “Timing 3” / T8 to T10), “Second mode (large) Button (white)) ”, and in the fourth period (“Timing 3” and later / T10 to T13), it becomes “fourth mode (stick)” (see FIG. 47), and any button development effect pattern. In order to display the "regulation line" during the non-valid period (T4 to T11), in the specific example 4, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 53 (A). Further, in the specific example 4, since the "weak action effect (character appearance)" is determined for the timing 1 (weak change), the character appears in "T5" to "T6" and the image such as a button is displayed in "T6". The "first mode (small button (white))" is changed to the "second mode (large button (white))" (one-step change) (success production). Further, in the specific example 4, since the "medium action effect (cannon)" was determined for the timing 3 (medium change), the cannon was made to appear in "T9" to "T10", and the image such as a button was displayed in "T10". The second mode (large button (white)) is changed to the "fourth mode (stick)" (two-step change) (success production).

(Specific example 5)
FIG. 53B shows the flow of the button development effect in the specific example 5. In Specific Example 5, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is assumed to be the variation pattern “PB5 ′ -X”. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines in the button development effect determination process (S90529) to execute the button development effect (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH4c" (S90552), and determines the button development effect pattern "BH4c". -1 ”is determined (S90553), and“ no action effect ”is determined (S90554) for the action effect such as buttons for timing 1 (“no change” in “BH4c-1”), and timing 2 (“BH4c-1”” is determined. Then, "no action effect" is determined for the action effect such as buttons for "no change") (S90554), and the action effect such as buttons for timing 3 ("strong change (1st → 4th)" in "BH4c-1"). It is assumed that the "strong action production" has been decided.

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4c-1" determined in the specific example 5, the image of the button or the like is the first period (before "timing 1" / T4 to T6) or the second period ("timing 1" to In the "timing 2" / T6 to T8) and the third period ("timing 2" to "timing 3" / T8 to T10), it becomes the "first mode (small button (white))" and the fourth period ("" After "Timing 3" / T10 to T13), it becomes the "fourth mode (stick)" (see FIG. 47), and any button development effect pattern is "regulated" during the non-valid period (T4 to T11). In order to display the "line", in the specific example 5, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 53 (B). Further, in the specific example 5, since the "strong action effect (thunderstorm)" is determined for the timing 3 (strong change), a thunderstorm appears in "T9" to "T10" and an image such as a button is displayed in "T10". The first mode (small button (white)) is changed to the "fourth mode (stick)" (three-step change) (success production).

54 to 60 are diagrams showing an example of display operation in the display area of the image display device 5. In FIGS. 54 to 60, the character C901 is an ally character appearing in Super Reach α and Super Reach β, the character C902 is an enemy character appearing in Super Reach α, and the character C903 is an enemy character appearing in Super Reach β. Is.

54 and 55 show a display operation example of the specific example 3 (T2 or later) shown in FIG. 52 (B). Specifically, FIG. 54 (A) → FIG. 54 (B) → FIG. 54 (C) → FIG. 54 (D) → FIG. 54 (E) → FIG. 54 (F) → FIG. 55 (G) → FIG. 55 ( The transition is as follows: H) → FIG. 55 (I) → FIG. 55 (J) → FIG. 55 (K) → FIG. 55 (L) → FIG. 55 (M). FIG. 54 (A) is a reach scene (T2). FIG. 54 (B) is a scene (T3) in which the super reach α is reached. FIG. 54 (C) is a scene (T4) in which the display of the small button (white) D901 is started. Since it is the non-valid period (T4 to T11), the regulation line K90 is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D901 in FIG. 54 (C).

FIG. 54 (D) is a scene (T5) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at the timing 1 is started. In the specific example 3, since the action effect such as the button corresponding to the change at the timing 1 is not executed, the display in FIG. 54 (D) is the same as that in FIG. 54 (C) (excluding the operation of the characters C901 and C902). ing. FIG. 54 (E) is a scene (T6) in which a change or the like at timing 1 is performed. In Specific Example 3, since there is no change at the timing 1, the display in FIG. 54 (E) is the same as that in FIG. 54 (D) (excluding the operations of the characters C901 and C902).

FIG. 54 (F) is a scene (T7) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at the timing 2 is started. In the specific example 3, since the action effect such as the button corresponding to the change at the timing 2 is not executed, the display in FIG. 54 (F) is the same as that in FIG. 54 (E) (excluding the operation of the character C901 and the character C902). ing. FIG. 55 (G) is a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. In Specific Example 3, since the change is weak at the timing 2, in FIG. 55 (G), the small button (white) D901 is changed to the large button (white) D902 (one-step change). Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 55 (G), the regulation line K90 is displayed superimposed on the large button (white) D902.

FIG. 55 (H) is a scene (T9) in which execution of an action effect such as a button corresponding to a change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at the timing 3 is started. In Specific Example 3, since the weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 3, in FIG. 55 (H), the character JS (the code "JS" is not used) as the weak action effect. The image JS901 prayed by the figure (the same applies hereinafter) is displayed. FIG. 55 (I) is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In Specific Example 3, since the change is weak at the timing 3, in FIG. 55 (I), the large button (white) D902 is changed to the large button (red) D903 (one-step change). Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 55 (I), the regulation line K90 is displayed superimposed on the large button (red) D903. Further, in FIG. 55 (I), the image JS902 that the character JS is pleased with is also displayed.

FIG. 55 (J) is a scene (T11) in which the operation corresponding to the large button (red) D903 (operation of the push button 9031B) is enabled. Since the validity period (T11 to T13) has expired, the regulation line K90 is not displayed in FIG. 55 (J). FIG. 55 (K) is a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 55 (J). In order to encourage the player to operate the push button 9031B, the large button (red) D903 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 55 (J) is displayed as the large button (red) D903U in FIG. 55 (K). It is displayed large in the center of the area. In addition, in FIG. 55 (K), information (gauge, numerical value) for notifying the amount of the remaining valid period may be displayed. The same applies to FIGS. 57 (K), 58 (E), 59 (E), and 60 (E). In FIG. 52 (B), the position of T12 is shown away from the position of T11 for convenience of illustration. The same applies to other figures such as FIG. 51 (B).

FIG. 55 (L) shows a scene when the player operates the push button 9031B during the valid period (T11 to T13), or the player pushes during the valid period (T11 to T13). This is a scene (T13) when the valid period ends when the button 9031B is not operated. In Specific Example 3, since it is a big hit, the ally character C901 wins. That is, as a result of the operation (operation of the push button 9031B) corresponding to the large button (red) D903 (large button (red) D903U), the victory or defeat (winning of the character C901) is notified. In addition, in FIG. 55 (L), it is described as T13 as the case where the player does not operate the push button 9031B. The same applies to other figures. FIG. 55 (M) is a scene (T14) at which the variable display ends. Immediately after FIG. 55 (M), a fanfare effect is executed.

56 and 57 show a display operation example of the specific example 4 (T2 or later) shown in FIG. 53 (A). Specifically, FIG. 56 (A) → FIG. 56 (B) → FIG. 56 (C) → FIG. 56 (D) → FIG. 56 (E) → FIG. 56 (F) → FIG. 57 (G) → FIG. 57 ( The transition is as follows: H) → FIG. 57 (I) → FIG. 57 (J) → FIG. 57 (K) → FIG. 57 (L) → FIG. 57 (M). FIG. 56 (A) is a reach scene (T2). FIG. 56 (B) is a scene (T3) in which the super reach β is reached. FIG. 56C is a scene (T4) in which the display of the small button (white) D901 is started. Since it is the non-valid period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 56C, the regulation line K90 is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D901.

FIG. 56 (D) is a scene (T5) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at the timing 1 is started. In Specific Example 4, a weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as a button action effect corresponding to a change at timing 1, and therefore, in FIG. 56 (D), an image JS901 prayed by the character JS is displayed as a weak effect effect. ing. FIG. 56 (E) is a scene (T6) in which a change or the like at timing 1 is performed. In Specific Example 4, since the change is weak at the timing 1, in FIG. 56 (E), the small button (white) D901 is changed to the large button (white) D902 (one-step change). Since it is the non-valid period (T4 to T11), the regulation line K90 is displayed superimposed on the large button (white) D902 in FIG. 56 (E). Further, in FIG. 56 (E), the image JS902 that the character JS is pleased with is also displayed.

FIG. 56 (F) is a scene (T7) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at the timing 2 is started. In the specific example 4, since the action effect such as the button corresponding to the change at the timing 2 is not executed, the display in FIG. 56 (F) is the same as that in FIG. 56 (E) (excluding the operations of the characters C901 and C903). ing. FIG. 57 (G) is a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. In Specific Example 4, since there is no change at the timing 2, in FIG. 57 (G), the display is the same as in FIG. 56 (F) (excluding the operations of the characters C901 and C903).

FIG. 57 (H) is a scene (T9) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at the timing 3 is started. In the specific example 4, since the medium action effect (cannon) is executed as the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 3, in FIG. 57 (H), the image TS901 of the cannon is displayed as the medium action effect. FIG. 57 (I) is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In Specific Example 4, since the change is medium at the timing 3, the large button (white) D902 is changed to the stick D904 (two-step change) in FIG. 57 (I). Since it is the non-valid period (T4 to T11), the regulation line K90 is displayed superimposed on the stick D904 in FIG. 57 (I). Further, in FIG. 57 (I), the image TS902 of the firing smoke and the image TS903 of the impact at the time of hitting are also displayed. If there is no change in the medium action effect (that is, if it is a failure effect), for example, it may not be fired, or it may not be hit even if it is fired.

FIG. 57 (J) is a scene (T11) in which the operation corresponding to the stick D904 (the operation of the stick controller 9031A) is enabled. Since the validity period (T11 to T13) has expired, the regulation line K90 is not displayed in FIG. 57 (J). FIG. 57 (K) is a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 57 (J). In order to encourage the player to operate the stick controller 9031A, the stick D904 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 57 (J) is displayed large as the stick D904U in FIG. 57 (K) in the center of the display area. ing.

FIG. 57 (L) shows a scene when the player operates the stick controller 9031A during the valid period (T11 to T13), or the player sticks during the valid period (T11 to T13). This is a scene (T13) when the valid period ends when the controller 9031A is not operated. In the specific example 4, since it is a big hit, the ally character C901 wins. That is, as a result of the operation corresponding to the stick D904 (stick D904U) (operation of the stick controller 9031A), the victory or defeat (winning of the character C901) is notified. FIG. 57 (M) is a scene (T14) at which the variable display ends. Immediately after FIG. 57 (M), a fanfare effect is executed.

FIG. 58 shows a display operation example of the specific example 1 (T8 or later) shown in FIG. 51 (B). Specifically, the transition is as follows: FIG. 58 (A) → FIG. 58 (B) → FIG. 58 (C) → FIG. 58 (D) → FIG. 58 (E) → FIG. 58 (F) → FIG. 58 (G). To do. FIG. 58 (A) is a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. Since there is no change in the timing 2 in the specific example 1, the small button (white) D901 is displayed in FIG. 58 (A) as in the case of the timing 1 and later. Since it is the non-valid period (T4 to T11), the regulation line K90 is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D901 in FIG. 58 (A). In Specific Example 1, a weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as an action effect such as a button corresponding to a change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at timing 2, but the change at timing 2 is In FIG. 58 (A), the image JS902 that the character JS is pleased with is not displayed because there is no such thing (that is, because it is a failure effect).

FIG. 58 (B) is a scene (T9) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 3 is started. In the specific example 1, since the action effect such as the button corresponding to the change at the timing 3 is not executed, the display in FIG. 58 (B) is the same as that in FIG. 58 (A) (excluding the operation of the character C901 and the character C902). ing. FIG. 58 (C) is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In Specific Example 1, since there is no change at the timing 3, the display in FIG. 58 (C) is the same as that in FIG. 58 (B) (excluding the operations of the characters C901 and C902).

FIG. 58 (D) is a scene (T11) in which the operation corresponding to the small button (white) D901 (the operation of the push button 9031B) is enabled. Since the validity period (T11 to T13) has been reached, the regulation line K90 is not displayed in FIG. 58 (D). FIG. 58 (E) is a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 58 (D). In order to encourage the player to operate the push button 9031B, the small button (white) D901 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 58 (D) is displayed as the small button (white) D901U in FIG. 58 (E). It is displayed large in the center of the area.

FIG. 58 (F) shows a scene when the player operates the push button 9031B during the valid period (T11 to T13), or the player pushes during the valid period (T11 to T13). This is a scene (T13) when the valid period ends when the button 9031B is not operated. In Specific Example 1, the enemy character C902 has won because it is lost. That is, as a result of the operation (operation of the push button 9031B) corresponding to the small button (white) D901 (small button (white) D901U), the victory or defeat (winning of the character C902) is notified. FIG. 58 (G) is a scene (T14) at which the variable display ends. Immediately after FIG. 58 (G), the following variable display is executed.

FIG. 59 shows a display operation example of the specific example 2 (T8 or later) shown in FIG. 52 (A). Specifically, the transition is as follows: FIG. 59 (A) → FIG. 59 (B) → FIG. 59 (C) → FIG. 59 (D) → FIG. 59 (E) → FIG. 59 (F) → FIG. 59 (G). To do. FIG. 59 (A) is a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. Since there is no change in the timing 2 in the specific example 2, in FIG. 59 (A), the large button (white) D902 is displayed as in the case of the timing 1 and later. Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 59 (A), the regulation line K is displayed superimposed on the large button (white) D902.

FIG. 59 (B) is a scene (T9) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 3 is started. In the specific example 2, since the weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 3, in FIG. 59 (B), the image JS901 prayed by the character JS is displayed as the weak effect effect. ing. FIG. 59 (C) is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In Specific Example 2, since there is no change at the timing 3, in FIG. 59 (C), the display is the same as in FIG. 59 (B) (excluding the operations of the characters C901 and C902). Since this is a failure effect, the image JS902 that the character JS is pleased with is not displayed in FIG. 59 (C).

FIG. 59 (D) is a scene (T11) in which the operation corresponding to the large button (white) D902 (the operation of the push button 9031B) is enabled. Since the validity period (T11 to T13) has expired, the regulation line K90 is not displayed in FIG. 59 (D). FIG. 59 (E) is a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 59 (D). In order to encourage the player to operate the push button 9031B, the large button (white) D902 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 59 (D) is displayed as the large button (white) D902U in FIG. 59 (E). It is displayed large in the center of the area.

FIG. 59 (F) shows a scene when the player operates the push button 9031B during the valid period (T11 to T13), or the player pushes during the valid period (T11 to T13). This is a scene (T13) when the valid period ends when the button 9031B is not operated. In Specific Example 2, the enemy character C902 wins because it is lost. That is, as a result of the operation (operation of the push button 9031B) corresponding to the large button (white) D902 (large button (white) D902U), the victory or defeat (winning of the character C902) is notified. FIG. 59 (G) is a scene (T14) at which the variable display ends. Immediately after FIG. 59 (G), the following variable display is executed.

FIG. 60 shows a display operation example of the specific example 5 (T8 or later) shown in FIG. 53 (B). Specifically, the transition is as follows: FIG. 60 (A) → FIG. 60 (B) → FIG. 60 (C) → FIG. 60 (D) → FIG. 60 (E) → FIG. 60 (F) → FIG. 60 (G). To do. FIG. 60 (A) is a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. Since there is no change at the timing 2 in the specific example 2, the small button (white) D1 is displayed in FIG. 60 (A) as in the case of the timing 1 and thereafter. Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 60 (A), the regulation line K is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D1.

FIG. 60B is a scene (T9) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 3 is started. In Specific Example 5, a strong action effect (thunderstorm) is executed as a button action effect corresponding to a change at the timing 3, and therefore, in FIG. 60B, a thunderstorm image KS901 is displayed as a strong effect effect. FIG. 60 (C) is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In Specific Example 5, since the change is strong at the timing 3, the small button (white) D901 changes to the stick D904 (changes in three steps) in FIG. 60 (C). Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), the regulation line K90 is displayed superimposed on the stick D904 in FIG. 60 (C). Further, in FIG. 60C, an image of lightning bolt KS902 and an image of impact at the time of hit KS903 are also displayed. According to FIG. 49 (C), the change is always performed in the strong effect effect, but when it does not change in the strong effect effect (that is, in the case of a failure effect), for example, there is no lightning strike or there is a lightning strike. You may not hit.

60 (D) to 60 (G) are the same as those of FIGS. 57 (J) to 57 (M), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As the operations during the valid period (T11 to T13), the player may be requested to perform a continuous striking operation (described later) or a long press operation (described later). Further, during the valid period (T11 to T13), the auto button and the automatic continuous striking function described below may be enabled.

(About auto button and auto repeated hits)
Next, the auto button will be described. The effect control CPU 90120 is for setting, for example, whether to enable or disable the function of the auto button (described later) before executing the effect determination process (S90150) at the time of winning of the effect control process process (S9076). You may execute the auto button setting process of. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the auto button setting process in the effect control process process (S9076), subsequently executes the winning effect determination process (S90150), and subsequently executes the effect control flag setting unit 90191 and the like. Any of the processes of steps S90170 to 90177 can be selected and executed according to the value of the effect process flag provided in. The auto button setting process may be executed regardless of the value of the effect process flag. For example, the auto button setting process is performed after the winning effect determination process (S90150) is executed in the effect control process process (S9076). The process may be executed, or the auto button setting process may be executed before the effect control process process (S9076) is executed in the effect control main process (FIG. 42).

In the following description, the button notice effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the notice display is based on the detection of a single operation or a continuous hit operation of a button or the like (push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A) in the button notice effect. Shall be displayed. The "single-shot operation" means that the button or the like is operated once, and the "continuous hit operation" means that the button or the like is continuously operated a plurality of times.

The button advance notice effect is the above-mentioned button development effect, and displays the result of super reach (win / loss, etc.) based on the detection of a single operation or repeated hit operation of a button or the like during the button development effect (during the valid period). You may.

Further, the "auto button" is a function of executing processing assuming that the buttons or the like are actually operated, although the buttons or the like (push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A) are not actually operated by the player. Is. That is, when the function of the auto button is enabled, even if the button or the like is not operated, the process is executed assuming that the button or the like is operated once or repeatedly, and the notice display is displayed.

In addition, "automatic continuous hitting" means that the player actually continuously operates the buttons and the like (for example, long press of the push button 9031B, long press of the stick controller 9031A, etc.) "long press" and long press without distinction. Although it is sometimes referred to as a "push operation"), the button or the like is continuously operated multiple times (for example, the push button 9031B is repeatedly hit, the stick controller 9031A is continuously pulled, etc.). It is a function to detect as. That is, when the automatic continuous striking function is enabled, even if the button or the like is not continuously operated a plurality of times, the process is executed assuming that the button or the like is repeatedly striking and the notice display is displayed. To do.

Further, the button notice effect may be one type, but may be a plurality of types. Hereinafter, as a plurality of types of button notice effects, button notice effects A, button notice effects B, and button notice effects C) are prepared. For example, when the valid period of the button advance notice effect A and the button advance notice effect B is started, a gauge display according to the number of operations of the push button 9031B is displayed, and each time the operation of the push button 9031B is detected, the gauge display is displayed. The display is updated so that the scale of is reduced by one, and when the number of times the operation is detected reaches a predetermined number (that is, when the scale of the gauge display becomes 0), it is determined that the operation condition is satisfied. It is like displaying a notice display (for example, a character string such as "super heat!" Or "chance!"). Further, for example, when the operation of the push button 9031B is detected once during the valid period, the button notice effect C determines that the operation condition is satisfied and displays a notice display (for example, character A or character B). It's like doing.

In the following description, apart from the button notice effect, a back button notice effect that causes the light emitting member 909CC or the like to emit light in a predetermined manner is provided based on the fact that the operation of the button or the like is detected during the valid period. To do. In the button notice effect, when the valid period is started, a notification is given to indicate that the operation is valid or to prompt the operation, while in the back button notice effect, the valid period (hereinafter, valid in the button notice effect). Even if the special validity period is started to distinguish it from the period), the notification indicating that the operation is valid or prompting the operation is not performed. Therefore, there is a way to enjoy the back button notice effect by finding out the special validity period and executing it. Due to such characteristics of the back button notice effect, in the present embodiment, even when the auto button function is enabled, if the operation of the button or the like is not detected during the special valid period, the back button notice is given. It is configured so that the light emitting member 909CC or the like is not controlled to emit light in a predetermined mode by the effect.

In the present embodiment, the auto button setting process is executed at an arbitrary timing (for example, a period during which the demo screen is displayed, a period during which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, or a period during which the jackpot game is in progress). It is possible to set whether to enable or disable the auto button function based on the operation of the button or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the auto button setting by the auto button setting process, the auto button can be set from the setting menu (menu screen in which the background image, volume, brightness, etc. can be set). And. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the automatic continuous hitting function is always effective, but like the auto button function, it may be possible to set whether to enable or disable it.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the auto button setting process. Note that, in FIG. 61 (the same applies to FIGS. 62 and 63), the operation of the push button 9031B will be described as the operation of the buttons and the like, but the same applies to the stick controller 9031A.

In the auto button setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the auto button enable flag indicating that the auto button function is valid is set (step S907101).

When it is determined that the auto button valid flag is not set (step S907101; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 is set with the operation valid period flag indicating that the operation in the button notice effect is in the valid period. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S907102). If the flag is set during the operation valid period (step S907102; YES), the auto button setting process ends.

When it is determined that the flag is not set during the operation valid period (step S907102; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the long press operation of the push button 9031B is detected (step S907103). .. If the long press operation of the push button 9031B is not detected (step S907103; NO), the auto button setting process ends. Regarding whether or not the long press operation of the push button 9031B is detected, for example, in the timer interrupt, the operation detection flag is set when the pressing operation of the push button 9031B is detected, and the operation is detected if the pressing operation is not detected. When the flag is configured to be reset, the operation detection flag is set, and the state of detecting the pressing operation of the push button 9031B continues for a predetermined period, it is determined that the long press operation is detected. You may do so.

When the long press operation of the push button is detected (step S907103; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the auto button enable flag (step S907104).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the image display device 5 to display an auto button valid display indicating that the auto button function is valid (step S907105). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 controls to output an auto button effective sound effect indicating that the auto button function is effective (step S907106). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 has an auto button function effectively set, which is different from the normal light emitting mode (for example, emitting white light) of the push button LED (LED provided in the push button 9031B). Is controlled to emit light according to a special light emitting mode (for example, emitting red light) to notify the above (step S907107).

When it is determined that the auto button valid flag is set (step S907101; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 has a special operation valid period flag indicating that the operation in the back button notice effect is in the valid period. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step S907108). If the flag is set during the special operation valid period (step S907108; YES), the auto button setting process ends.

If it is determined that the flag is not set during the special operation valid period (step S907108; NO), is the effect control CPU 90120 set with the setting menu display flag indicating that the setting menu is being displayed? It is confirmed whether or not (step S907109), and if it is set (step S907109); YES), the auto button setting process ends.

When the setting menu display flag is not set (step S907109; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the push button 9031B pressing operation (single operation) is detected (step S907110). If the pressing operation (single operation) of the push button 9031B is not detected, the auto button setting process ends.

When the pressing operation (single-shot operation) of the push button 9031B is detected (step S907110; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 resets the auto button enable flag (step S907111).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the image display device 905 to display the auto button invalid display indicating that the auto button function is invalid (step S907112). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 controls to output an auto button invalid sound effect (sound effect different from the above auto button effective sound effect) indicating that the function of the auto button is invalid (step S907113). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the push button LED to emit light in a normal light emitting mode (step S907114).

Although the auto button setting process has been described above with reference to FIG. 61, the auto button function can be enabled or disabled at an arbitrary timing by executing the auto button setting process shown in FIG. 61. Specifically, the player can enable the auto button function by pressing and holding the push button 9031B when the auto button function is disabled (see steps S907101, S907103, and S907104). ), When the push button 9031B is pressed (single operation) while the auto button function is enabled, the auto button function can be disabled (see steps S907101, S907110, and S907111). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily change the setting of the auto button function not only during the period when the demo screen is displayed, but also during the period when the decorative pattern is variablely displayed and during the big hit game. it can. That is, the setting of the auto button function can be easily changed without interrupting the game once, and it is possible to prevent the interruption from deteriorating the interest.

However, in the present embodiment, an exceptional period is provided in which the setting change of the auto button function is not accepted. For example, when the auto button function is disabled, a long press operation may be performed to display the notice display during the valid period in the button notice effect, but the auto button function responds to this long press operation. If the setting of is changed, the setting change is not intended by the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the long press operation of the push button 9031B is detected during the valid period of the operation in the button notice effect (that is, when the operation valid period flag is set), the auto button It is configured not to change the function from disabled to enabled (see step S907102). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting of the auto button function from being unintentionally changed.

It should be noted that, during the valid period of the operation in the back button notice effect, or based on the detection of the decision button effect (pressing operation (single operation) of the push button 9031B during the valid period), a hit / fail display indicating whether or not the hit is a big hit is displayed. Since the predetermined control is performed based on the detection of the pressing operation (single-shot operation) during the valid period in the effect (the effect of displaying), the player does not need to perform the long-pressing operation. However, since it is assumed that the intention to perform a single operation will result in a long press operation, during the valid period of the operation in the back button notice effect (that is, when the special operation valid period flag is set). Also, during the valid period of the operation in the fixed button effect (when the flag is set during the valid period of the fixed button effect operation indicating that the operation in the fixed button effect is valid), the push button 9031B is pressed and held. Even if an operation is detected, the function of the auto button may be configured not to be changed from disabled to enabled. Similarly, a single operation of the push button 9031B may be performed to change the background image setting or the auto button setting from the displayed setting menu, but as a result, a long press operation is performed with the intention of performing the single operation. Therefore, even if the push button 9031B is detected for a long time while the setting menu is being displayed (that is, when the setting menu display flag is set), the auto button function is activated. It may be configured not to change from invalid to valid.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when the auto button function is enabled, the push button 9031B must be pressed in order to execute the back button notice effect. ing. Therefore, an operation for executing the back button notice effect may be performed during the valid period of the operation in the back button notice effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the pressing operation of the push button 9031B is detected during the valid period of the operation in the back button notice effect (that is, when the flag during the special operation valid period is set), the auto button is displayed. It is configured not to change the function of the above from valid to invalid (see step S907108). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting of the auto button function from being unintentionally changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the push button 9031B may be pressed in order to change the background image setting or the auto button setting from the setting menu. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the pressing operation of the push button 9031B is detected while the setting menu is being displayed (that is, when the setting menu display flag is set), the function of the auto button is disabled from being enabled. It is configured not to change to (see step S907109). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting of the auto button function from being unintentionally changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the button advance notice effect is started when the auto button function is enabled, and when the player operates the push button 9031B in response to the button advance notice effect, the auto button is activated. The function of is changed from valid to invalid (for example, realized by the processing of steps S907101 and S907108 to S907111), but in addition to the function of the auto button being changed from valid to invalid, the detection result of the operation May be reflected in the button notice effect. With such a configuration, even if the auto button function is enabled, if the player wants to perform an operation, the operation can be immediately reflected in the production.

When the player operates the push button 9031B in response to the button advance notice effect started when the auto button function is enabled, the auto button function is changed from enabled to disabled. Instead of the configuration, for example, the auto button function setting may not be changed during the execution of the button advance effect, and the auto button function may be changed from enabled to disabled after the button advance effect is completed. Good. A configuration for changing the function of the auto button from valid to invalid after the button notice effect is completed can be realized, for example, by executing the following processing. When the effect control CPU 90120 detects the operation of the push button 9031B in step S907110, it executes the processes of steps S907111 to S907114 if it is not during the valid period of the button advance notice effect, and enables the auto button function during the valid period. The process of setting the auto button change hold flag indicating that the change to invalid is suspended is executed, and the auto button setting process is terminated without executing the processes of steps S907111 to S907114. Then, if the auto button change hold flag is set at the end of the button notice effect (for example, the timing when the notice display is displayed or the end timing of the valid period), the effect control CPU 90120 has the function of the auto button. Change from enabled to disabled (ie, reset the auto button enable flag and reset the auto button change hold flag). For the configuration in which the auto button function is changed from valid to invalid after the button notice effect is completed (configuration in which the setting change of the auto button function is temporarily suspended), the push button 9031B is repeatedly pressed. Of the button notice effect A and the button notice effect B in which the notice display is displayed based on the detection, and the button notice effect C in which the notice display is displayed based on the detection of the single operation of the push button 9031B. It may be applied to only one of the above, or to both.

Further, when the player operates the push button 9031B in response to the button advance notice effect, the auto button function may be changed from valid to invalid after the button advance notice effect is completed. In addition to the fact that the operation of the push button 9031B is detected at predetermined intervals by the function, the player may detect that the push button 9031B is actually operated and reflect it in the effect. That is, the continuous striking operation by the auto button and the actually performed operation may be reflected in the effect. In such a configuration, for example, when the auto button change hold flag is set, the value of the operation count counter (the effect is performed according to the value) is updated at predetermined intervals by the function of the auto button. In addition, it is realized by updating the value of the operation count counter according to the operation of the push button 9031B.

Further, for example, when the push button 9031B is configured to be deformable and the push button 9031B is deformed into a shape different from the normal state according to a predetermined effect (that is, the effect accompanied by the deformation of the push button 9031B is being executed. Even if the pressing operation of the push button 9031B is detected, the setting of the auto button may not be changed. For example, when the operation is strongly urged by deforming the push button 9031B, it is possible that there is no intention of changing the setting even if the operation is performed. When the push button 9031B is deformed into a shape different from the normal state, for example, the button portion is deformed to a state of protruding toward the player side from the normal state, or the push button 9031B is combined in the normal state. In addition to the case where the button part is split, the case where a plurality of button part parts are combined to form one button part, and the like, it is rotatable (for example, about the rotation axis in the vertical direction). It also includes the case where the button portion that is rotatable or rotatable about the horizontal rotation axis is rotating.

Next, a display mode when the auto button function is enabled or disabled will be described. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display mode when the function of the auto button is set to be enabled or disabled. In FIG. 62, the mode of the display screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3). In the case of FIG. 62 (1), it is assumed that the auto button function is disabled.

As shown in FIG. 62 (1), when the player presses and holds the push button 9031B while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed, the auto button is displayed as shown in FIG. 62 (2). Is enabled, and a character string such as "auto button enabled" is displayed on the image display device 905 to indicate that the auto button function is enabled. At this time, in addition to controlling the output of the auto button effective sound effect from the speaker 908, the push button 9031B is controlled to emit light in a special light emitting mode (see steps S907103 to S907107).

Further, if the push button 9031B is pressed (single-shot operation) by the player while the auto button function is enabled, the auto button function is invalid as shown in FIG. 62 (3). At the same time, a character string such as "auto button invalid" is displayed on the image display device 905, and a display indicating that the auto button function is disabled is displayed. At this time, in addition to the control of outputting the auto button invalid sound effect from the speaker 908, the control of causing the push button 9031B to emit light in the normal light emitting mode is performed (see steps S90710 to S907114).

In the example of FIG. 62, the setting of the auto button function is changed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, but in the present embodiment, the same operation is performed not only during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The setting of the auto button function can be changed even during the demo screen display period and the jackpot game period.

Next, the difference between the case where the automatic continuous hitting is performed by the long press operation and the case where the automatic continuous hitting is performed by the auto button function will be described. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing a comparative example of automatic continuous striking by a long press operation and auto continuous striking by an auto button function. It should be noted that, in the automatic continuous hitting by the long press operation during the valid period, the continuous hit determination is turned on after the predetermined start waiting period elapses after the long pressing operation of the push button 9031B is started, but the start waiting period is the button notice effect. It may be different depending on the type. In the description of FIG. 63, it is assumed that the start waiting period of the button notice effect A is 4 seconds and the start waiting period of the button notice effect A is 2 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 63, it is assumed that the execution of the button notice effect A is determined.

Regarding the button notice effect A, when the automatic continuous striking by the long press operation is performed after the start of the valid period, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), the start standby is performed after the long press operation of the push button 9031B is started. After the period (4 seconds) has elapsed, the continuous hit judgment is turned on (that is, the process is executed assuming that the continuous hit operation has been performed after 4 seconds of the long press operation, and the scale of the gauge display is reduced. I will go).

On the other hand, with respect to the button notice effect A, when the auto button function is used for automatic continuous striking, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the continuous striking determination is turned on immediately after the start of the valid period (that is,). Immediately after the start of the valid period, the process is executed assuming that the repeated hitting operation is being performed, and the scale of the gauge display decreases). With such a configuration, when the auto button function is enabled and the long press operation is not performed, and when the auto button function is disabled and the long press operation is performed, the effect (for example, the scale of the gauge display is reduced). ) Can be executed at different timings, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, regarding the button notice effect B, when the automatic continuous hitting is performed by the long press operation after the start of the valid period, although not shown, the start waiting period (2) after the long press operation of the push button 9031B is started. After 2 seconds have passed, the continuous hit judgment is turned on (that is, the process is executed assuming that the continuous hit operation has been performed 2 seconds after the long press operation, and the gauge display scale is reduced), and the button notice is given. Regarding the effect B, when the auto button function is used for automatic continuous hitting, the continuous hitting determination is turned on immediately after the start of the valid period. That is, in both cases of the button notice effect A and B, the effect is produced when the auto button function is valid and the long press operation is not performed, and when the auto button function is invalid and the long press operation is performed. (For example, reduction of the gauge display scale) is configured to be executed at different timings.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the device configuration, the data structure, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device 905, and the like are arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Is possible.

For example, in the above embodiment, the display start timing of the button or the like image (“initial” in FIG. 47) is after the development of super reach (see FIG. 51 (A)), but the display start timing of the button or the like image is It may be before the development of super reach or during the development of super reach. Further, in the above embodiment, the change timing of the image such as a button (“timing 1”, “timing 2”, “timing 3” in FIG. 47) was after the development of super reach (see FIG. 51 (A)). , Buttons, etc. The change timing of the image may be before the development of super reach or at the time of development of super reach.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern of super reach with pseudo-continuous fluctuation ("PA4'-2", "PA4'-3", "PA5'-2", "PA5'-3", "PB4'-2", "PB4" In all or part of the fluctuation patterns of "-3", "PB5'-2", "PB5'-3"), temporary stop display and revariable display are performed after the super reach is reached. You may.

Further, the button development effect may be executed (display of an image such as a button) over a plurality of variable displays (or revariable displays) in the pseudo-continuous variation. As an example, when the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-2" progresses in the order of variable display start → reach → first temporary stop display and revariable display → development to super reach β → final stop display. The display and change timing of images such as buttons in the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-2" ("initial", "timing 1", "timing 2", "timing 3" in FIG. 47) are, for example, "initial" before reach. Assuming that the period between the reach and the first temporary stop display is "timing 1", the period between the first temporary stop display and the revariable display is "timing 2", and the period after the revariable display is "timing 3". Good. Therefore, when the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined in the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-2", the variable display start → small button (white) is displayed ("initial") → reach → large button ( Change to white) (timing 1) → first temporary stop display → no change (timing 2) → revariable display → change to large button (red) (timing 3) → final stop display. As another example, the fluctuation pattern "PB5'-3" starts variable display → reach → first temporary stop display and revariable display → evolves into super reach β → second temporary stop display and revariable display → final In the case of progress such as stop display, the display and change timing of images such as buttons in the fluctuation pattern "PB5'-3" are set to "initial" between reach and the first temporary stop display, for example. "Timing 1" is set between the first temporary stop display and the re-variable display, and "timing 2" is set between the development of Super Reach β and the second temporary stop display after the second re-variable display. It may be "timing 3". Therefore, when the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined in the fluctuation pattern "PB5'-3", the variable display start → reach → small button (white) is displayed (“initial”) → the first time. Temporary stop display → Change to large button (white) (timing 1) → re-variable display → develop to super reach β → no change (timing 2) → second temporary stop display → re-variable display → large button (red) Change (timing 3) → final stop display.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the variable display of a certain variable display is started, whether or not the button development effect is executed is determined based on the variable display variation pattern of the variable display (FIGS. 46, 48, 49 (FIGS. 46, 48, 49). A)), you may decide whether or not to execute the button development effect at other timings. For example, when there is a start prize, it may be determined whether or not to execute the button development effect based on the variable category or the like. In addition, at other timings (for example, at the time of starting winning, etc.), in addition to whether or not the button development effect is executed, the effect mode of the button development effect (button development effect pattern, etc.) and the effect mode of the button or the like action effect may be determined. Good.

When determining whether or not to execute the button development effect, the effect mode of the button development effect (button development effect pattern, etc.), and the effect mode of the action effect such as the button when there is a start prize, the button is before the variable display related to the start prize. The button development effect may be started during the variable display related to the start prize without starting the development effect, or the button development effect may be started before the variable display related to the start prize.

If the button development effect is started before the variable display related to the start prize (so-called pre-reading to execute the button development effect), the button development effect is immediately started (displays an image such as a button) at the start prize. Alternatively, the button development effect may be started at the start of the variable display corresponding to the prize before the start prize (when the hold display is shifted), or during the variable display corresponding to the prize before the start prize (when the hold display is shifted). The button development effect may be started before the reach or after the reach). The period from the start of the button development effect during the look-ahead period (when the display of the button or the like display is started) to the predetermined timing of the variable display related to the start winning prize (for example, T13 in FIG. 51) is the button or the like display period. is there.

Further, in the above embodiment, the button action effect (weak effect effect, medium effect effect, strong effect effect) is suddenly executed without any warning (for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (H), the image JS901 shows. Suddenly displayed, the image TS901 is suddenly displayed as shown in FIG. 57 (H), the image KS901 is suddenly displayed as shown in FIG. 60 (B), etc.), for example, the jackpot expectation is high or the jackpot is high. A notice effect for notifying that the image is controlled to the game state (for example, a character drop effect for dropping the movable accessory 9017 to a position in the center of the display area of the image display device 905, a cut-in effect for cutting in the image, etc. A button or the like action effect may be executed by executing a countdown effect (such as a countdown effect for displaying a number). Specifically, at least, there may be a case where the action effect such as a button is executed by executing the notice effect and a case where the action effect such as a button is executed without executing the notice effect (notice effect). Is executed, but it may or may not be present when the action effect such as a button is not executed). It should be noted that the ratio of whether the image such as a button changes depending on whether the action effect such as a button is executed by executing the advance notice effect or the action effect such as a button is executed without executing the advance notice effect. Or, the ratio of which button or the like changes to the image may be different.

Further, in the above embodiment, the degree of expectation of a big hit differs depending on the type of display such as a button (“small button (white)”, “large button (white)”, “large button (red)”, “stick”). (See FIG. 49 (B)), the degree of expectation of a 16R probability variation jackpot may differ depending on the type of display such as a button. Specifically, for example, the determination ratio of the button development effect category may be different depending on the jackpot type (see FIG. 29). Further, when a normal jackpot is provided in addition to the probability variation jackpot as the jackpot type, the degree of expectation of the probability variation jackpot may differ depending on the type of display such as a button.

(A1) As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the embodiment of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a detecting means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A). Etc.) and a specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, small button (white) D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904 shown in FIGS. 47 and 54 to 60, Specific display execution means (for example, button development effect processing (S90529), variable display during effect process (S90172)) that performs a small button (white) D901U, a large button (white) D902U, a large button (red) D903U, a stick D904U, etc. Etc.), and the specific display executing means has, as the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button (white) D901 or the like) and an advantage for the player (for example) over the first specific display. , Expectation of big hit, expectation of 16R probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 29), expectation of probability variation jackpot when there are normal jackpot and probability variation jackpot) High second specific display (for example, small button for first specific display) When the (white) D901 is used, the second specific display is the large button (white) D902, the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., and when the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the second is The specific display can display a large button (red) D903, stick D904, etc., and when the first specific display is a large button (red) D903, the second specific display can display stick D904, etc.), and the first specific display can be displayed. Is displayed, and then the second specific display can be displayed by executing the action effect (for example, the weak action effect, the medium action effect, and the strong action effect shown in FIG. 49 (C)) that act on the specific display. (For example, after displaying the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIG. 56 (C), the image JS901 acting on the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIGS. 56 (D) and 56 (E) The large button (white) D902 can be displayed as shown in FIG. 56 (E) by executing the weak effect effect for displaying the image JS902, and the large button (white) D902 can be displayed as shown in FIG. 56 (E). After the display, as shown in FIGS. 57 (H) and 57 (I), the medium action effect of displaying the image TS901, the image TS902, and the image TS903 acting on the large button (white) D902 is executed, so that FIG. 57 As shown in (I), the stick D904 can be displayed, etc.).

According to the above configuration, the effect of production is improved. For example, by changing the specific display depending on the action effect, the effect is easy to understand and the effect is improved.

(A2) The gaming machine according to (A1) has the above-mentioned action after displaying the first specific display during the non-effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60). When the effect is executed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, after displaying the large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 56 (E), FIG. 57 (H) and Large button (white) as shown in FIG. 57 (I) The large button (white) as shown in FIG. 57 (I) is formed by executing the medium action effect of displaying the image TS901, the image TS902, and the image TS903 acting on the D902. (White) D902 is changed to stick D904), and during the valid period of detection by the detection means (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60), the second specific display (for example, FIG. 57 (J)). And the operation effect using the stick D904, the stick D904U, etc. as shown in FIG. 57 (K) (for example, the operation is prompted as shown in FIG. 57 (K) and the result is obtained as shown in FIG. 57 (L). The effect of notifying, etc.) is executed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation before the validity period.

(A3) In the gaming machine of the above (A1) or (A2), there are a plurality of types of the action effects (for example, the weak action effect, the medium action effect, the strong action effect, etc. shown in FIG. 49C). The rate of change to the second specific display differs depending on which of the above-mentioned action effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 49C, there is no change and there is a change (weak change, medium). Since the determination ratios of the weak action effect, the medium action effect, and the strong action effect are different in the case of (change or strong change), the display changes to the second specific display depending on which button or other action effect is executed. The ratio is different).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the action effect.

(A4) In any of the game machines (A1) to (A3), the action effect is a plurality of types (for example, the weak action effect, the medium action effect, the strong action effect, etc. shown in FIG. 49 (C)). There are a plurality of types of display modes of the specific display after the change (for example, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, and large button (white) shown in FIGS. 47 and 54 to 60. ) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc.), and the ratio of which change to the specific display is different depending on which action effect is executed (for example, FIG. 49 (C). ), Weak effect effect, medium effect effect, strong effect effect in the case of weak change (1 step change), medium change (2 step change), and strong change (3 step change). Since the determination ratios of each of these are different, the ratio of weak change, medium change, and strong change is different depending on which button action effect is executed. For example, the small button (white) before the change. In the case of D901, when a weak change is executed, the small button (white) D901 changes to a large button (white) D902, and when a medium change is executed, the small button (white) D901 becomes a large button (red) D903. When it changes and a strong change is executed, the small button (white) D901 changes to the stick D904. Therefore, the ratio of which specific display is changed depending on which button or other action effect is executed. Is different).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the action effect.

(A5) In any of the gaming machines (A1) to (A4), the detection means has a plurality of types (for example, push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A, etc.), and corresponds to the specific display after the change. The motion effect detected by the detection means is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 59, the motion effect detected by the push button 9031B corresponding to the large button (white) D902 after the change is executed, and is shown in FIG. 55. As described above, the operation effect detected by the push button 31B corresponding to the large button (red) D903 after the change is executed, and as shown in FIGS. 57 and 60, the stick controller 9031A corresponding to the stick D904 after the change executes the operation effect. Execute the detected motion effect).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which operation means the specific display corresponds to.

(A6) In any of the gaming machines (A1) to (A5), the specific display executing means has an ineffective period of detection by the detecting means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60). ), The specific display is displayed in an manner indicating that it is in the non-valid period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 60, a small button on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed (for example). (White) D901, large button (white) D902 on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed, large button (red) D903 on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed, and stick D904 on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed are displayed).

According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that the period is non-valid.

(A7) In any of the gaming machines (A1) to (A6), the specific display executing means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo-continuous fluctuations). It is possible to change by displaying the specific display over, displaying the specific display over multiple variable displays by pre-reading, etc.).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation over a plurality of variable displays.

(A8) A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect) for notifying that any of the game machines (A1) to (A7) is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. , Countdown effect, character drop effect, etc.), and the action effect is executed by executing the advance notice effect.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for a specific advance notice effect.

(A9) In any of the game machines (A1) to (A8) above, the setting state related to the effect is set to the first state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is disabled) or the second state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is disabled). Setting means that can be set to the state in which the auto button function is enabled (for example, the auto button setting process shown in FIG. 61) and a specific effect (for example, button notice) when the effect execution condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the operation of the push button 9031B in the effects A to C and the decision button effect, it is possible to execute a display that reduces the scale of the gauge display, a notice display, a pass / fail display, etc.). The specific effect executing means (for example, the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 44) is provided, and the specific effect executing means executes the effect in the first state based on the detection result of the detection means. While the specific effect can be executed assuming that the condition is satisfied, in the second state, the specific effect can be executed assuming that the effect execution condition is satisfied regardless of the detection result of the detection means (for example, the auto button function). When is enabled, even if the push button 9031B is not operated, the notice display, the pass / fail display, the display that reduces the scale of the gauge display, etc. are performed), the setting means is While the variable display is being executed, the setting can be changed from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the detection means (for example, a portion for executing the processes of steps S907103 to S907104 in FIG. 61).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered.

(B1) The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a detecting means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A, etc.). And the specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, small button (white) D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button shown in FIGS. 47 and 54 to 60). Specific display execution means for performing (white) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc. (for example, button development effect processing (S90529), variable display during effect processing (S90172), etc.) As the specific display, the specific display executing means has a first specific display (for example, a small button (white) D901, etc.) and an advantage for the player (for example, a big hit) over the first specific display. The second specific display (for example, the first specific display is a small button (white)) with a high degree of expectation, the degree of expectation that will be a 16R probability variation jackpot (see FIG. ) When the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., the second specific display is the large button (white) D902, and when the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the second specific display Can display a large button (red) D903, stick D904, etc., and when the first specific display is a large button (red) D903, the second specific display is stick D904, etc.), and the detection by the detection means is not performed. During the valid period (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60), after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 54 (C). ) Is displayed, the small button (white) D901 is changed to the large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 55 (G), and the large button (white) D902 is further displayed. Is changed to a large button (red) D903 as shown in FIG. 55 (I)), and after the change in the valid period of detection by the detection means (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60). An operation effect using the second specific display (for example, large button (red) D903 or large button (red) D903U as shown in FIGS. 55 (J) and 55 (K)) (for example, FIG. 55 (K)). ) Is urged to operate, and the result is notified as shown in FIG. 55 (L).

According to the above configuration, the effect of production is improved. For example, since the specific display is changed during the non-valid period, the change can be shown and the effect of the effect is improved.

(B2) In the gaming machine of the above (B1), the first specific display is an action effect acting on the specific display (for example, a weak action effect, a medium action effect, and a strong action effect shown in FIG. 49 (C)). Is executed to change to the second specific display (for example, the small button (white) D901 shown in FIG. 56 (C) has a small button (for example, as shown in FIGS. 56 (D) and 56 (E)). White) When the weak action effect of displaying the image JS901 and the image JS902 acting on the D901 is executed, the large button (white) D902 is changed as shown in FIG. 56 (E), and the large button (white) is changed to the large button (G) shown in FIG. 57 (G). As shown in FIGS. 57 (H) and 57 (I), the button (white) D902 is subjected to a medium-action effect of displaying the image TS901, the image TS902, and the image TS903 acting on the large button (white) D902. As shown in FIG. 57 (I), the stick D904 is changed, and the small button (white) D901 shown in FIG. 60 (A) is changed to the small button (white) as shown in FIGS. 60 (B) and 60 (C). ) The stick D904 is changed as shown in FIG. 60 (C) by executing the strong action effect of displaying the image KS901, the image KS902, and the image KS903 acting on the D901).

According to the above configuration, the effect effect is improved by the action effect.

(B3) In the game machine according to (B1) or (B2), there are a plurality of types of action effects acting on the specific display (for example, weak action effect, medium action effect, and strong action shown in FIG. 49 (C) and the like. There is an effect, etc.), and the rate of change to the second specific display differs depending on which of the action effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 49C, there is a change from no change). Since the determination ratios of the weak action effect, the medium action effect, and the strong action effect are different in the case of (weak change, medium change, or strong change), the second action effect depends on which button or the like action effect is executed. The rate of change to a specific display is different).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the action effect.

(B4) In any of the game machines (B1) to (B3), the action effects acting on the specific display include a plurality of types (for example, the weak action effect and the medium action effect shown in FIG. 49C). There are a plurality of types of display modes of the specific display after the change (for example, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904 shown in FIGS. 47 and 54 to 60). , Large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc.), and the ratio of which change to the specific display differs depending on which action effect is executed (for example). , As shown in FIG. 49 (C), there are weak action effect and medium action in the case of weak change (1 step change), medium change (2 step change), and strong change (3 step change). Since the determination ratios of the effect and the strong effect are different, the ratio of weak change, medium change, and strong change is different depending on which button or other action effect is executed. For example, before the change In the case of the small button (white) D901, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (white) D902 when the weak change is executed, and the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (white) D901 when the medium change is executed. It changes to (red) D903, and when a strong change is executed, the small button (white) D901 changes to stick D904. Therefore, which specific display is used depending on which button or other action effect is executed. The rate of change is different).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the action effect.

(B5) In any of the game machines (B1) to (B4), the detection means has a plurality of types (for example, push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A, etc.), and corresponds to the specific display after the change. Execute the operation effect detected by the detection means (for example, as shown in FIG. 59, execute the operation effect detected by the push button 9031B corresponding to the large button (white) D902 after the change, and show in FIG. 55. As described above, the operation effect detected by the push button 9031B corresponding to the large button (red) D903 after the change is executed, and as shown in FIGS. 57 and 60, the stick controller 9031A corresponding to the stick D904 after the change executes the operation effect. Execute the detected motion effect).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which operation means the specific display corresponds to.

(B6) In any of the gaming machines (B1) to (B5), the specific display executing means has a non-valid period of detection by the detecting means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 51 to 60). ), The specific display is displayed in an manner indicating that it is in the non-valid period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 60, a small button on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed (for example). (White) D901, large button (white) D902 on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed, large button (red) D903 on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed, and stick D904 on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed are displayed).

According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that the period is non-valid.

(B7) In any of the game machines (B1) to (B6), the specific display executing means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo-continuous fluctuations). It is possible to change by displaying the specific display over, displaying the specific display over multiple variable displays by pre-reading, etc.).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation over a plurality of variable displays.

(B8) A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect) for notifying that any of the game machines (B1) to (B7) is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. , Countdown effect, character drop effect, etc.), the action effect acting on the specific display is executed by executing the advance notice effect, and the second specific effect is executed by executing the action effect. Change to display.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for a specific advance notice effect.

(B9) In any of the game machines (B1) to (B8) above, the setting state related to the effect is set to the first state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is disabled) or the second state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is disabled). Setting means that can be set to the state in which the auto button function is enabled (for example, the auto button setting process shown in FIG. 61) and a specific effect (for example, button notice) when the effect execution condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the operation of the push button 9031B in the effects A to C and the decision button effect, it is possible to execute a display that reduces the scale of the gauge display, a notice display, a pass / fail display, etc.). The specific effect executing means (for example, the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 44) is provided, and the specific effect executing means executes the effect in the first state based on the detection result of the detection means. While the specific effect can be executed assuming that the condition is satisfied, in the second state, the specific effect can be executed assuming that the effect execution condition is satisfied regardless of the detection result of the detection means (for example, the auto button function). When is enabled, even if the push button 9031B is not operated, the notice display, the pass / fail display, the display that reduces the scale of the gauge display, etc. are performed), the setting means is While the variable display is being executed, the setting can be changed from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the detection means (for example, a portion for executing the processes of steps S907103 to S907104 in FIG. 61).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered.

In the above (A1) to (A9) and the above (B1) to (B9), the "detection means" is not limited to the push button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A, and the object (object) provided in the housing is provided. A sensor or the like that detects an operation using a structure (for example, an operation of pushing all or a part of an object in the back direction or a downward direction, an operation of pulling in a front direction or an upward direction, an operation of rotating or sliding, etc.). You may. Further, it may be a sensor or the like that detects the contact of the player's body (hand, etc.) with the glass surface or the like, or a sensor that detects the movement of the player's body (hand, face, etc.) that does not come into contact with the game machine. And so on. That is, the "detection means" may be a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, a camera, or the like. When the "detection means" is, for example, a touch sensor capable of detecting a touch on the glass surface, the "specific display" is an image reminiscent of the touch on the glass surface (for example, an image imitating a palm). ) May be.

In addition to the above, changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the spirit of the invention. For example, in the above description, when it is decided to execute the button development effect, the button development effect category is determined before the button development effect pattern is determined (see FIG. 48), but the button development effect pattern is directly determined. You may decide. That is, it is not necessary to use the concept of the button development effect category.

Further, the button development effect pattern shown in FIG. 47 is a button development effect pattern in which the "initial" is the "first mode (small button (white))", but the "initial" is the "second mode (large button)". (White)) ”,“ Third aspect (large button (red)) ”, and“ Fourth aspect (stick) ”are button development effect patterns.

Further, in the above embodiment, the timing of starting the display of the image of the button or the like is constant (T4), but the timing of starting the display of the image of the button or the like may have a plurality of timings. There may be a plurality of timings for each type of image such as a button.

Depending on the display start timing, the ratio of whether or not the image such as a button changes (growth) later and the ratio of how much the image changes may be different. For example, when the display start timing is late, the rate at which the image such as a button changes later is higher than when the display start timing is early, and the rate at which the stick is changed may be higher. Further, in a mode in which there are a plurality of types of timings from the non-valid period to the valid period (described later), the ratio of the timing from the non-valid period to the valid period may be different depending on the display start timing. For example, when the display start timing is late, the rate at which the timing from the non-valid period to the valid period becomes later than the predetermined timing may be higher than when it is early. Further, when there is a mode in which the non-valid period does not change to the valid period (described later), the ratio of whether or not the valid period is set may be different depending on the display start timing. For example, when the display start timing is late, the effective period may be higher than when it is early. Further, in the mode of executing the removal success effect (described later), the execution rate of the removal success effect may be different depending on the display start timing. For example, when the display start timing is late, the execution rate of the removal success effect may be higher than when it is early.

Further, the button development effect pattern shown in FIG. 47 changes the image such as a button at a maximum of two change timings out of the three change timings (timing 1, timing 2, timing 3), but all (three). ) May change the image, such as a button. That is, a button development effect pattern is provided in which a weak change (1st → 2nd) occurs at timing 1, a weak change (2nd → 3rd) occurs at timing 2, and a weak change (3rd → 4th) occurs at timing 3. May be good. Further, the change timing does not have to be three times, and may be one, two, four or more times.

In addition, a button development effect pattern for notifying the confirmation of the jackpot may be provided. As an example, a large rainbow-colored button image ("large button (rainbow)") imitating the push button 9031B and a rainbow-colored stick controller image ("stick (rainbow)") imitating the stick controller 9031A are displayed as "sticks (rainbow)". A button development effect pattern (sometimes referred to as a "big hit confirmed button development effect pattern") in which the "final" is the "fifth aspect" is provided as the "fifth mode", and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (big hit) (big hit) In "PB4'-X" "PB5'-X"), the button development effect pattern for confirming the jackpot may be determined, but the fluctuation pattern of super reach (loss) ("PA4'-X" "PA5'-X") In "), the button development effect pattern for confirming the jackpot may not be determined.

Further, the operating means (push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A, etc.) may emit light at least a part (or the periphery), and the operating means may be changed according to an image such as a button. For example, when no image such as a button is displayed, both the light emitting part of the push button 9031B and the light emitting part of the stick controller 9031A are turned off, and when the small button (white) is displayed, the light emitting part of the push button 9031B is white. When the large button (white) is displayed, the light emitting part of the push button 9031B blinks in white (or lights in red), and when the large button (red) is displayed, the push button 9031B is lit. The light emitting portion of the stick controller 9031A may be lit in red (or blinking in red), and when the stick is displayed, the light emitting portion of the stick controller 9031A may be lit in white (or blinking in white). When the light emitting unit of the operating means is blinked, the image such as a button may also be blinked.

Further, in FIG. 47 and the like, the image such as a button corresponds to one of the two operating means (one of the operating means is valid). Specifically, the small button (white), the large button (white), and the large button (red) correspond to the push button 9031B, and the stick corresponds to the stick controller 9031A. Instead of this, an image such as a button corresponding to both of the two operating means may be displayed. As an example, in any case of the small button (white), the large button (white), the large button (red), and the stick, both the push button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A may be enabled. Since the operation means is changed on the way, by enabling both, it is possible to prevent the situation where the result (win / loss, etc.) is not displayed even though the operation is performed. Further, as another example, the logo mark corresponding to both the push button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A (for example, the logo mark related to the content used in the production of the pachinko game machine 901 and the brand name of the pachinko game machine 901 are related. Logo mark, etc.) may be displayed. That is, when the logo mark is displayed during the valid period, the result is displayed regardless of whether the push button 9031B is operated or the stick controller 9031A is operated.

Further, according to FIG. 49 (C), when the "strong action effect" is executed, it is expected to be mainly a "strong change", but a "medium change" or a "weak change" that is less than expected. In some cases. If the execution of the "strong action effect" results in a "medium change" or a "weak change", the expected "strong change" corresponds to a so-called downturn, and the player may be disappointed. Therefore, when it is a "weak change" or a "medium change", the "strong action effect" may not be determined. As a result, when the "strong action effect" is executed, the "strong change" is confirmed, and the player is not discouraged. Further, when the button image or the like changes after the execution of the "medium action effect", it is expected to be mainly a "medium change", but it may be a "weak change" less than expected. Therefore, when it is a "weak change", the "medium action effect" may not be determined. As a result, when the button image or the like changes after the "medium action effect" is executed, the "medium change" or more is confirmed, and the player is not discouraged. When there is no change, the "strong action effect" is not determined, but when there is no change, the "medium effect effect" may not be determined in addition to the "strong effect effect".

In addition, the degree of change (number of steps) of changes in images such as buttons is divided into "weak action effects" that change one step, "medium action effects" that change two steps, and "strong action effects" that change three steps. Etc.) to control (manage), but classify what changes the change of the image such as a button (for example, the second action effect that changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the first aspect and the second aspect). It may be controlled by a third action effect that changes from the aspect to the third aspect, a first action effect, a second aspect, a fourth action effect that changes from the third aspect to the fourth aspect, and the like).

Further, in the above embodiment, the super reach is a so-called battle effect in which a ally character and an enemy character confront each other, but the super reach is not limited to the battle effect. For example, in the case of a big hit, the story may be completed successfully (in the case of a loss, the story may not be completed successfully). When the button development effect is executed in the story-based super reach, for example, depending on the operation during the valid period (as an action effect), the result of the story is replaced with the result of the battle effect (win or lose, etc.). (Whether or not the story is completed successfully) should be notified.

When the non-valid period changes to the valid period, the effect of removing the image (for example, the regulation line K90 shown in FIGS. 54 to 60) for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect (hereinafter, "removal effect"). In addition, it may be referred to as “removal success effect” to distinguish it from “removal failure effect” described later). For example, between FIGS. 59 (C) and 59 (D), the effect of removing the regulation line K90 superimposed on the large button (white) D902 (for example, a character (policeman, etc.) collects the regulation line K90). The effect of sucking the regulation line K90 to the vacuum cleaner, the effect of burning off the regulation line K90 with a flame, the effect of the large button (white) D902 itself shaking, etc., and the effect of removing the regulation line K90 may be performed. ..

Further, the removal failure effect (the effect in which at least a part of the effect mode is common to the removal success effect and the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect is not removed) may be executed. When the removal failure effect is executed, the super reach may be terminated without the valid period. That is, for example, when the removal success effect is executed in FIG. 59, FIG. 59 (C) → removal success effect → FIG. 59 (D) → FIG. 59 (E) → FIG. 59 (F) → FIG. 59 (G). ), On the other hand, when the removal failure effect is executed in FIG. 59, the transition may be made in the order of FIG. 59 (C) → removal failure effect → FIG. 59 (F) → FIG. 59 (G). ..

In addition, there are multiple types of timing from the non-valid period to the valid period, and when the non-valid period changes to the valid period late, the non-valid period is longer than when it is early, so images such as buttons are sufficient. It may be changed (grown) to. In addition to the case where the removal success effect is executed without executing the removal failure effect even once, the case where the removal success effect is executed after the removal failure effect is executed once or more, or the case where the removal failure effect is executed. The removal success effect may not be executed after being executed one or more times. As a result, when the image such as a button is not sufficiently grown, the player considers that the expiration date is premature and the removal success effect is not executed (for example, the effect of trying to remove the regulation line K90 starts. If this is done, it is hoped that the regulation line K90 will not be removed in the end, that is, the removal failure effect is being executed instead of the removal success effect), but the validity period is when the image such as a button is sufficiently grown. (For example, when the effect of removing the regulation line K90 is started, the regulation line K90 is finally removed, that is, not the removal failure effect. (The removal success effect is being executed). In other words, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the effect according to the situation is executed.

The image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect may be another image instead of the image of the regulation line. For example, it may be an image of a chain and a key hung on an image of a button or the like, an image of a translucent case for storing an image of a button or the like, or ice to be shown on an image of a frozen button or the like. It may be.

Depending on the type of image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect, the ratio of whether or not the image such as a button changes (growth) later and the ratio of how much the image changes may be different. For example, in the case of "chain and key", the rate of change of the image such as a button later may be higher than that of the case of "regulation line", and the rate of change of the stick may be higher. Further, in a mode in which there are a plurality of types of timings from the non-valid period to the valid period, the ratio of the timings from the non-valid period to the valid period differs depending on the type of the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in progress. You may let me. For example, in the case of "chain and key", the rate at which the timing from the non-valid period to the valid period becomes later than the predetermined timing may be higher than in the case of the "regulation line". Further, in the case where the non-valid period does not change to the valid period, the ratio of whether or not the valid period may be changed may be different depending on the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect. For example, in the case of "chain and key", the ratio of validity period may be higher than in the case of "regulation line". Further, in the mode of executing the removal success effect, the execution rate of the removal success effect may be different depending on the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect. For example, in the case of "chain and key", the execution rate of the removal success effect may be higher than in the case of "regulation line".

In addition, the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in progress may be changed (grown). For example, when it is a small button (white), it is set as "regulation line", when it is a large button (white), it is changed to "chain and key", and when it is a large button (red), it is changed to "semi-transparent case". The image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect may be changed at the same timing as the change timing of the image such as a button, such as changing to "ice" when it becomes a stick. .. Also, for example, when it is a large button (white), it changes from "regulation line" to "chain and key", and when it is a stick, it changes from "chain and key" to "translucent case" and further "ice". The image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect may be changed at a timing different from the change timing of the image such as a button, such as changing to.

In the embodiment of changing the image for notifying that it is in the non-valid period, the image for notifying that it is in the non-valid period may be changed by the action effect. The action effect of changing the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect may be the same (common) as the action effect of changing the image such as a button. It should be noted that, when a common action effect is executed, when the image for notifying that the image such as a button is also in the ineffective period also changes, and the image for notifying that the image such as the button is also in the ineffective period is notified. There may be times when both of the images for the purpose do not change, and times when either one of them changes. Further, the action effect of changing the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect and the action effect of changing the image such as a button may be different. That is, in addition to the action effect of changing the image such as a button, a dedicated action effect of changing the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in progress may be provided.

In addition, the same type of effect may change (grow) the image for notifying that it is in the non-valid period, or remove the image for notifying that it is in the non-valid period. There may be. That is, by executing the action effect of changing the image to notify that the non-valid period is in effect, the notification that the non-valid period is in effect is notified in the same manner as when the above-mentioned removal effect is executed. The image to be used may be removed. That is, when a certain effect (an effect having the properties of both an action effect and a removal effect) is executed, the image such as a button may or may not change, and it is notified that it is in an ineffective period. There may be times when the image is changed, times when it is removed, and times when nothing happens. It may be removed after the change (for example, the changed "ice" is removed after the change from the "translucent case" to the "ice"). Regarding the image for notifying that the image is in the non-valid period, two ways of being removed or not being removed have been described, but there are stages in the removal, and the image may be gradually removed. In other words, when a certain effect (effect that has both the properties of action effect and removal effect) or removal effect is executed, the "ice" breaks a little, and again, a certain effect (effect that has both the properties of action effect and removal effect) or removal. The "ice" may be completely cracked and removed when the effect is performed. If the image for notifying that it is in the non-valid period is in the process of being removed, it may not change, or it may be changeable and return to the original state after the change. It may be changeable and the above-mentioned intermediate state may be maintained after the change. For example, if the "translucent case" is slightly cracked, it may not change to "ice", it may change to unbroken "ice", or it may change to slightly cracked "ice". It may change.

Further, in the above embodiment, the hold data (first hold information) of the first special figure game and the hold data (second hold information) of the second special figure game are digested in the order of winning without distinguishing them (2). (See FIG. 40), the second reserved information may be preferentially digested.

Further, in the above embodiment, the “ratio” is not limited to the relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B: C = 70%: 20%: 10%. As shown in 49 (B) and FIG. 50 (A), the relationship is such that A: B = 100%: 0% and A: B: C = 70%: 30%: 0% (that is, , 100% and 0% allocation exists) is also included in the concept.

Further, in the above embodiment, the number of rounds is two types of 8 rounds and 16 rounds, but the number of rounds may be 3 or more types. For example, there may be three types: 4R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine in which only the probabilistic jackpot is provided as the jackpot type is shown, but as described above, the gaming machine may include the non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot) as the jackpot type.

Further, in the above embodiment, a mode is shown in which a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating "0" to "8" and symbols indicating "-" are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. Is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the special symbol to be variably displayed and the special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result may be different. In other words, a special symbol that is not included in the fluctuating plurality of types of special symbols may be derived and displayed as a variable display result, and some of the fluctuating plurality of types of special symbols are not specially derived and displayed as a variable display result. May be included. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and the variable display may be performed using only one type of special symbol. As a variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked (the lighting / extinguishing may be repeated alternately). That is, the repetition of turning on and off may be a variable display. Even in this case, the one type of special symbol may be derived and displayed (lit) at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be. The same applies to the variable display of other symbols (for example, ordinary symbols, decorative symbols, etc.).

Further, in the above embodiment, the jackpot game state is controlled based on the fact that the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, but the jackpot game state is controlled. The mode to be used is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided near the second start winning opening or inside the second starting winning opening, and the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the entry (passage) of the game ball into the specific area. You may stay in.

Further, in the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 9012 of the variation pattern indicating the variation time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc., one variation pattern designation command is used when the variation is started. Is shown, but the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 9012 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90100 uses the first command to indicate whether or not there is a pseudo-ream, whether or not there is a sliding effect, etc., before reaching (so-called when not reaching). A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. after reaching the reach (if it does not reach the so-called first). 2 After the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode may be transmitted. In this case, on the effect control board 9012 side, the effect control in the variable display may be performed based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 90100 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 9012 selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. May be good. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has passed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

Further, in the above embodiment, a random value determination table (display result determination table, jackpot type determination table, and variable category determination table) is stored in the main substrate 9011 and extracted from the main substrate 9011 at the time of starting winning. Based on the random number values (MR1'to MR3'), the main board 9011 refers to the random value value determination table, and performs random value determination processing (determination of whether or not a jackpot is achieved, determination of a variable category, and jackpot). In some cases, the determination of the type of jackpot) is executed, and the effect control board 9012 receives the determination result determined by the main board 9011 and executes the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the received determination result. However, the execution mode of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the effect control board 9012 stores the above random number value determination table, and the main board 9011 transmits the random number value itself to the effect control board 9012 (for example, an effect control command capable of specifying the random number value from the main board 9011). Is transmitted to the effect control board 9012), the effect control board 9012 receives the random number value itself extracted from the main board 9011, and refers to the random number value determination table based on the received random number value. The determination process of the above may be executed, and the pre-reading advance notice effect may be executed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the random value determination process may be performed on the effect control board 9012. Further, the random value determination process may be performed on both the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. For example, the effect control board 9012 may receive a part of the random numbers and execute the random value determination process, and may also receive the determination result determined on the main board 9011. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 9012 receives random values (MR1'and MR2') and determines whether or not it will be a big hit, and if it is a big hit, it executes a determination of the type of big hit. The determination result of the variation category determined by the main board 9011 based on the random number value (MR3') may be received. That is, the effect control board 9012 can execute the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main board 9011.

Further, the update timing of each random number may be different, or the update range of each random number may be different so that the random numbers may not be synchronized.

Further, for example, a game machine that gives a game score for use in a game by using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified from the recording information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can be applied. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine in which a game player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the game machine into a game area.

Further, in the above description, it has been explained that the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. It does not necessarily have to be stored in a table format (including, for example, structures, arrays, etc.). That is, the determination values (determined values) to be compared with the extracted random number values may be collectively stored in the ROM 90101, or may be dispersed (spotted) in a plurality of locations of the ROM 90101 and stored. Alternatively, a mathematical formula or program that outputs a result (for example, a big hit or a loss in the example of FIG. 28) when the extracted random value is input may be stored in the ROM 90101. The same applies to the determination table and the like stored in the ROM 90121.

Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted to set a predetermined number of bets, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, so that the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.). For example, the slot machine to which the present invention is applied performs a detection means (effect button) capable of detecting the movement of the player and a specific display (effect button image imitating the effect button) corresponding to the detection means. The specific display executing means includes the specific display executing means, and the specific display executing means has a higher advantage for the player than the first specific display (effect button image (white)) and the first specific display as the specific display. (For example, there is a high expectation that it will be a bonus, etc.) The second specific display (effect button image (red)) can be displayed, and after the first specific display is displayed, the action effect that acts on the specific display. May be a slot machine capable of displaying the second specific display by executing.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

1 Pachinko game machine 9 effect display device 100 effect control microcomputer 560 game control microcomputer 901 pachinko game machine 902 game board 903 game machine frame 904A first special symbol display device 904B second special symbol display device 905 image display device 905H Start winning prize storage display area 906A Normal winning ball device 906B Normal variable winning ball device 907 Special variable winning ball device 908 Speaker 909 Lamp 9011 Main board 9012 Production control board 9013 Voice control board 9014 Lamp control board 9015 Relay board 9016 Accessory control board 9017 Movable accessory 9020 Normal symbol display 9021 Gate switch 9022A First start port switch 9022B Second start port switch 9023 Count switch 9031A Stick controller 9031B Push button 90100 Game control microcomputer 90101, 90121 ROM
90102, 90122 RAM
90103 CPU
90104, 90124 Random number circuit 90105, 90125 I / O
90120 Production control CPU
90123 Display control unit 90126 RTC circuit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can display fluctuations in identification information and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Equipped with variable display means capable of variable display of identification information
The identification information includes the first information and the second information.
The display pattern of the identification information includes a first display pattern that displays the first information without displaying the second information, and a second display pattern that displays the first information and the second information.
The variation display means executes the variation display according to the first display pattern after the identification information starts to change in a predetermined direction, and stops the variation display according to the second display pattern.
The display mode differs between the first information when displayed in the first display pattern and the first information when displayed in the second display pattern.
further,
A detection means that can detect the movement of the player,
A specific display execution means for performing a specific display corresponding to the detection means is provided.
The detecting means can detect a first operation with respect to the first operating means and a second operation with respect to the second operating means.
The specific display executing means is
As the specific display, the first specific display corresponding to the first operation with respect to the first operating means, the second operation corresponding to the second operating means, and more for the player than the first specific display. It is possible to display the second specific display, which has a high degree of advantage,
During the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display.
During the valid period of detection by the detection means, an operation effect using the second specific display after the change is executed .
The variable display means
In the special reach that develops after a lapse of a predetermined time from the reach state, the first information is reduced and displayed, and the first information is reduced and displayed according to the effect sound output during the special reach. Display the information with the specified operation,
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the first information is enlarged and displayed, and then the first information is reduced and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the variable display of identification information is stopped, the second information is displayed so as to appear from behind the first information displayed in an enlarged manner .